diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.dtx')
| -rw-r--r-- | Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.dtx | 8072 |
1 files changed, 5071 insertions, 3001 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.dtx index 2a2c665f398..ac15490aefd 100644 --- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.dtx +++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/apacite/apacite.dtx @@ -1,6 +1,6 @@ % \iffalse meta-comment % -% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +% Copyright (C) 1994-2009 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed % elsewhere in this file. % % This file is part of the `apacite' package. @@ -34,7 +34,7 @@ % % \fi % -% \CheckSum{4973} +% \CheckSum{0} % \CharacterTable % {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z % Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z @@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ % \iffalse %<*dtx> \ProvidesFile{apacite.dtx} - [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite dtx file] + [2009/03/01 v4.05 apacite dtx file] %</dtx> %<driver>\ProvidesFile{apacite.drv} %<package|docpkg>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1999/12/01] @@ -70,27 +70,36 @@ %<spanish>\ProvidesFile{spanish.apc} %<swedish>\ProvidesFile{swedish.apc} %<bibdb>%% apa5ex.bib -%<bibstyle>%% apacite.bst -%<xbibstyle>%% apacitex.bst +%<bibstyle&!annotated>%% apacite.bst +%<bibstyle&annotated>%% apacann.bst +%<xbibstyle&!annotated>%% apacitex.bst +%<xbibstyle&annotated>%% apacannx.bst %^^A -%^^A I have to find out how I can replace the hard-coded date+version with a command -%^^A such that the value of the command is written to the file instead of the name. +%^^A I have to find out how I can replace the hard-coded date+version with a +%^^A command such that the value of the command is written to the file instead +%^^A of the name. %^^A -%<driver> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite documentation driver file] -%<package> [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA citation] -%<docpkg> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite documentation style] -%<english> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] -%<dutch> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] -%<finnish> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] -%<german> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] -%<ngerman> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] -%<greek> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] -%<norsk> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] -%<spanish> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] -%<swedish> [2007/09/03 v4.00 apacite language file] -%<bibdb>%% [2007/09/03 v4.00 bibliography database for apacite manual] -%<bibstyle>%% [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibliography style] -%<xbibstyle>%% [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibl. style with author index info] +%<driver> [2009/03/01 v4.05 apacite documentation driver file] +%<package> [2009/03/01 v4.05 APA citation] +%<docpkg> [2009/03/01 v4.05 apacite documentation style] +%<english> [2009/03/01 v4.05 apacite language file] +%<dutch> [2009/03/01 v4.05 apacite language file] +%<finnish> [2009/03/01 v4.05 apacite language file] +%<german> [2009/03/01 v4.05 apacite language file] +%<ngerman> [2009/03/01 v4.05 apacite language file] +%<greek> [2009/03/01 v4.05 apacite language file] +%<norsk> [2009/03/01 v4.05 apacite language file] +%<spanish> [2009/03/01 v4.05 apacite language file] +%<swedish> [2009/03/01 v4.05 apacite language file] +%<bibdb>%% [2009/03/01 v4.05 bibliography database for apacite manual] +%<bibstyle&!annotated>%% [2009/03/01 v4.05 APA bibliography style] +%<*xbibstyle&!annotated> +%% [2009/03/01 v4.05 APA bibl. style with author index info] +%</xbibstyle&!annotated> +%<bibstyle&annotated>%% [2009/03/01 v4.05 APA annotated bibliography style] +%<*xbibstyle&annotated> +%% [2009/03/01 v4.05 APA annotated bibl. style with author index info] +%</xbibstyle&annotated> % %<*install> %^^A ============================================= @@ -103,7 +112,7 @@ %% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation %% driver files from apacite.dtx when run through LaTeX. %% -%% Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +%% Copyright (C) 1994-2009 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed %% elsewhere in this file. %% %% This file is part of the `apacite' package. @@ -122,9 +131,9 @@ %% The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and %% apacite.ins, and the following generated files: %% apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, -%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, -%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, -%% greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +%% apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, apacann.bst, apacannx.bst, +%% english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, french.apc, german.apc, +%% ngerman.apc, greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. %% %% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' %% @@ -142,7 +151,7 @@ This is a generated file. -Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +Copyright (C) 1994-2009 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed elsewhere in this file. This file is part of the `apacite' package. @@ -161,9 +170,9 @@ LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and apacite.ins, and the following generated files: apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, -apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, -english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, -greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, apacann.bst, apacannx.bst, +english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, french.apc, german.apc, +ngerman.apc, greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' @@ -180,7 +189,7 @@ the generated files. This is a generated file. -Copyright (C) 1994-2007 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed +Copyright (C) 1994-2009 Erik Meijer and any individual authors listed elsewhere in this file. This file is part of the `apacite' package. @@ -199,9 +208,9 @@ LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later. The `apacite' package consists of the files apacite.dtx and apacite.ins, and the following generated files: apacite.sty, apacite.bst, apacitex.bst, apa5ex.bib, -apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, -english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, german.apc, ngerman.apc, -greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. +apacite.drv, apacdoc.sty, apacann.bst, apacannx.bst, +english.apc, dutch.apc, finnish.apc, french.apc, german.apc, +ngerman.apc, greek.apc, norsk.apc, spanish.apc, swedish.apc. This work has the LPPL maintenance status `maintained' @@ -232,6 +241,7 @@ do not change apacite.dtx for this purpose. \file{english.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{english}} \file{dutch.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{dutch}} \file{finnish.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{finnish}} + \file{french.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{french}} \file{german.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{german}} \file{ngerman.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{ngerman}} \file{greek.apc}{\from{apacite.dtx}{greek}} @@ -245,6 +255,8 @@ do not change apacite.dtx for this purpose. \file{apa5ex.bib}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibdb}} \file{apacite.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibstyle}} \file{apacitex.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{xbibstyle}} + \file{apacann.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{bibstyle,annotated}} + \file{apacannx.bst}{\from{apacite.dtx}{xbibstyle,annotated}} } \obeyspaces @@ -407,7 +419,7 @@ do not change apacite.dtx for this purpose. %<driver>%\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc} %<driver>%\documentclass[twoside,a4paper]{ltxdoc} %% -\usepackage{apacdoc}[2007/09/03] +\usepackage{apacdoc}[2009/03/01 v4.05] %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %% LOADING OF PACKAGES %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% @@ -427,7 +439,7 @@ do not change apacite.dtx for this purpose. %% \usepackage{german} %% %% Loading apacite with author index option. -\usepackage[ltxemindex,bibnewpage]{apacite}[2007/09/03] +\usepackage[ltxemindex,bibnewpage]{apacite}[2009/03/01 v4.05] %% \raggedbottom %% @@ -449,8 +461,8 @@ do not change apacite.dtx for this purpose. \CodelineNumbered %May stay %% %% For getting something useful out of greek.apc in the documentation. -\IfFileExists{iso-8859-7.def}{% - \usepackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}}{} +%%\IfFileExists{iso-8859-7.def}{% +%% \usepackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}}{} \begin{document} \DocInput{apacite.dtx} \end{document} @@ -486,6 +498,8 @@ do not change apacite.dtx for this purpose. % \changes{v3.2}{2005/06/08}{Fix of a small but annoying bug.} % \changes{v4.00}{2007/09/03}{Solved many compatibility issues; improved % and extended language support; more extensive customizability.} +% \changes{v4.05}{2009/03/01}{Some bug fixes; extended language support; +% annotated bibliographies.} % % \GetFileInfo{apacite.sty} % @@ -494,6 +508,7 @@ do not change apacite.dtx for this purpose. % % ^^A Start documentation here. % +% % \iffalse %<*dtx> % \fi @@ -685,14 +700,16 @@ APA publications are in English. However, many journals, universities, etc.\ in non-English speaking countries base their rules on the APA rules, and thus it may be useful to have the possibility to use \pkg{apacite} in combination with documents in non-English languages as well. This -language feature has been further extended in the current version. -See section~\ref{sec:compat-babel} for a description of the implementation -of this feature. +language feature has been further extended in the \APACversiondate{2007/09/03} +version. See section~\ref{sec:compat-babel} for a description of the +implementation of this feature. + +The most salient change in the \APACversiondate{2007/09/03} version was the +shift of many formatting decisions from \BibTeX\ to \LaTeX, so that they are +easier to change by the user. -The most salient differences in the current version are the much improved -compatibility with a large number of other packages (most notably -\pkg{hyperref}) and the shift of many formatting decisions from \BibTeX\ -to \LaTeX, so that they are easier to change by the user. +The current version adds some further improvements in customizability and +language support, and adds support for annotated bibliographies. Apart from the language support and the facilities for customization, the current version of \pkg{apacite} is aimed at conforming with the 5th edition @@ -732,108 +749,71 @@ will be inconvenient to other users, then I will not pursue it. %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \subsection*{New in this version} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -The changes since the \APACversiondate{2005/06/08} version are: +The changes since the \APACversiondate{2007/09/03} version are: \begin{itemize} -\item \pkg{apacite} is now packaged in \fname{dtx} - (\pkg{doc}/\pkg{docstrip}) form, as is usual for \LaTeX{} packages. - However, this is still rudimentary and considerable work is still - needed to separate documentation from source code and to insert - the convenient margin par notes and index entries. -\item The \pkg{apacite} manual-specific commands are now put in a separate - package file, \fname{apacdoc.sty}. Apart from specific commands and - settings that are only of interest for this manual, this contains - the definitions of commands that are considered too ad hoc, - ill-designed, or otherwise not generally useful, but that are - necessary to handle certain complicated references satisfactorily. - For the latter reason, these may be interesting for users who - encounter similar problems. See section~\ref{sec:apacdoc} for usage - instructions. -\item Improved customizability of the reference list by replacing many - formatting decisions made by \fname{apacite.bst}, i.e., in the - \BibTeX{} stage, by \LaTeX{} commands in the \fname{.bbl} file; - see section~\ref{sec:custom-big-formatting}. - In this way, formatting can be changed by the user by redefining - the \LaTeX\ commands through \cmd{\renewcommand}. Hence, many new - formatting commands have been introduced in \LaTeX. The drawback - of this is that it is less easy to read the \fname{.bbl} file - and make small changes by editing this file. -\item Added \pkgoption{indexpackage}, \pkgoption{noindexpackage}, and - \pkgoption{ltxemindex} options to be able to generate an author - index with or without the \pkg{index} package. -\item Resolved many compatibility problems between \pkg{apacite} and - other packages, esp.\ \pkg{natbib}, \pkg{hyperref}, and several - packages that can be used to generate multiple bibliographies - (see section~\ref{sec:compat}). The \pkgoption{hyper} and - \pkgoption{nohyper} have thus become obsolete and now give - innocuous warnings. -\item Added \pkgoption{includecorporate} and \pkgoption{suppresscorporate} - options that determine whether corporate authors are to be included - in the author index or not (with one of the indexing options, - of course). This works by using the \cmd{\bibcorporate} command - in the \fname{.bib} file. Also, if the author is the publisher as well, - the decision of how to indicate this in the reference list is now - deferred to the \LaTeX{} realm, so that the user can choose whether - to use the APA-dictated ``Author'' or the name of the publisher itself. -\item Added \cmd{\citeauthorNP}, \cmd{\fullciteauthorNP}, and - \cmd{\shortciteauthorNP} commands, which are equivalent to the non-\verb+NP+ - versions, except that they use the parenthetical ``and'' (`\&' by - default) between authors. -\item The citation commands now allow spaces between the works cited:\\ - \verb+\cite{Jones:1999, Smith:2001}+. This is more convenient - with word-wrapping text editors and corresponds to the implementation - of other citation packages, as well as standard \LaTeX. -\item Explicit (and thus improved) support of the \entryname{manual} - reference type. -\item The \fieldname{edition} and \fieldname{originaledition} fields can - now be supplied as numbers; the ``st'', ``nd'', ``rd'', and ``th'' - suffixes are automatically inserted in this case. If it is not a - number (e.g., ``Rev.'' or ``2nd'', then the argument is copied - literally, as in previous versions. -\item The location of a \entryname{lecture} can now be given in the - \fieldname{address} field and does not need to be included in the - \fieldname{howpublished} field anymore. -\item Added support for the \fieldname{url} and \fieldname{lastchecked} - fields to improve references to websites. Also, the number of other - fields that are supported has been increased, most notably - \fieldname{howpublished} for \entryname{book}s and \fieldname{address} - for \entryname{lecture}s; see Table~\ref{tab:fieldref}. Defined - URL formatting styles for usage with the \pkg{url} package that - adhere to the APA rules in this regard (esp.\ line-breaking). -\item Improved and extended language support (see section~\ref{sec:compat-babel}): - new added languages, thanks to \pkg{apacite} users, and extended - customizability. Additional commands that anticipate further - language-improvements are - \cmd{\BPBI}, \cmd{\BPBI}, \cmd{\APACmonth}, \cmd{\Bby}, \cmd{\BAuthor}, - \cmd{\BAvailFrom}, \cmd{\BRetrieved}, and \cmd{\BMsgPostedTo}. - However, these commands have not been defined in the language - files yet. -\item A few small changes to the examples from the APA manual - (section~\ref{sec:xmpl}), incorporating a few errata to - the APA manual published on the APA's web site. - Also, some improved tricks in the examples. - These primarily fix some problems with - the author index induced by earlier tricks. -\item Some minor changes and bug fixes that most users will not notice. - One consequence is that the earlier \pkgoption{accentfix} and - \pkgoption{noaccentfix} options have become obsolete and now give - innocuous warnings. + +\item +Addition of \fname{french.apc} to the list of language-specific files. + +\item +Improvements in various \fname{.apc} files. In particular, in addition +to some small changes in various files, all of the \fname{.apc} files +are greatly extended, supporting more language-specific elements. + +\item +Added support for annotated bibliographies through the \fname{apacann.bst} +and \fname{apacannx.bst} \BibTeX{} style files. See section~\ref{sec:annotate} +for details. + +\item +Introduction of the \cmd{\APACstdindex}, \cmd{\APACtocindex}, +\cmd{\APACemindex}, and \cmd{\APACltxemindex} commands, which change the +style of the index. + +\item +Improved source code documentation in the \fname{.dtx} file. + +\item +Some minor changes and bug fixes. In particular, a few problems that showed up +when the reference list contains multiple works by the same author(s) published +in the same year, have been resolved. + \end{itemize} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\subsection*{About this document} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +The current document describes how to use \pkg{apacite} and largely assumes +knowledge of or access to the standard \BibTeX{} documentation, such as +\citeA{Pata88}, \citeA[chap.~12]{KoDa04}, or \citeA[chap.~12 and~13]{TLC2}. +Hence, this document does not always describe how to use some of the citation +commands or how to construct a bibliography database file in detail if there +is no \pkg{apacite}-specific element to it. This document comes in two +versions. The version supplied with the distribution is the user's manual. +As is customary with packages that are distributed in \fname{.dtx} form, it is +also possible to regenerate the user's manual in such a way that it includes +the documented source code of the package as well. This is currently still +in a primitive form compared to other packages, but it will be improved +with later releases. The \fname{README} file describes how the documented +source code can be included in this manual. \citeA{meijer07} contains some +simple examples in which \pkg{apacite} is compared to standard \LaTeX/\BibTeX{} +citation, as well as a description of how \pkg{apacite} works technically. + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \section{Installation, package loading, and running \BibTeX{}} \label{sec:usage} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -As of this version, \pkg{apacite} is distributed as a \fname{.dtx} -file, like most \LaTeX{} packages. This file, \fname{apacite.dtx}, -is supplemented by a \fname{README} file, which gives a brief -introduction and installation instructions, the user's manual -in the file \fname{apacite.pdf} (which you are reading right now), -and the installation file \fname{apacite.ins}. Strictly speaking, -only the \fname{apacite.dtx} file is necessary, because the -installation file is regenerated from it if it is not available, -and the user's manual is generated by running \LaTeX{} on -\fname{apacite.dtx}. But it is customary (and convenient for -potential users) to include the other files as well. +\pkg{apacite} is distributed as a \fname{.dtx} file, like +most \LaTeX{} packages. The file \fname{apacite.dtx} is supplemented by a +\fname{README} file, which gives a brief introduction and installation +instructions, the user's manual in the file \fname{apacite.pdf} (which you are +reading right now), and the installation file \fname{apacite.ins}. Strictly +speaking, only the \fname{apacite.dtx} file is necessary, because the +installation file is regenerated from it if it is not available, and the user's +manual is generated by running \LaTeX{} on \fname{apacite.dtx}. But it is +customary (and convenient for potential users) to include the other files as +well. The \LaTeX{} packages, \BibTeX{} style files, and other files in the distribution are generated by running \LaTeX{} on \fname{apacite.ins}. @@ -846,6 +826,14 @@ This generates the following files: \item[\fname{apacitex.bst}] The \BibTeX{} reference list style with added author index support. This must also be placed in a directory where \BibTeX{} can find it. +\item[\fname{apacann.bst}] +\item[\fname{apacannx.bst}] Versions of \fname{apacite.bst} and + \fname{apacitex.bst} that generate annotated bibliographies (if the + \fieldname{annote} and/or \fieldname{annotate} fields are provided). Again, + these must be placed in a directory where \BibTeX{} can find it. Most + probably, some time in the future, the four \fname{.bst} files will be + combined in \fname{apacite.bst}, with the desired behavior induced by + options, but this is nontrivial and currently not implemented yet. \item[\fname{apa5ex.bib}] The file with bibliographic information about the references used in the user's manual (i.e., the current document). This is also useful for users to find out how @@ -863,9 +851,9 @@ This generates the following files: See section~\ref{sec:compat-babel} for a discussion of these. These must be placed in a directory where \LaTeX{} can find them. The files that are currently supplied are \fname{english.apc}, - \fname{dutch.apc}, \fname{finnish.apc}, \fname{german.apc}, - \fname{ngerman.apc}, \fname{greek.apc}, \fname{norsk.apc}, - \fname{spanish.apc}, and \fname{swedish.apc}. + \fname{dutch.apc}, \fname{finnish.apc}, \fname{french.apc}, + \fname{german.apc}, \fname{ngerman.apc}, \fname{greek.apc}, + \fname{norsk.apc}, \fname{spanish.apc}, and \fname{swedish.apc}. \item[\fname{apacdoc.sty}] A \LaTeX{} package that contains commands and settings used in this user's manual. This can be placed in a directory where \TeX{} can find it, but given that it is primarily @@ -964,7 +952,9 @@ The following options are recognized by \pkg{apacite}: The \pkgoption{index} option turns author indexing on. See section~\ref{sec:autindex} for a discussion of the author indexing facility. The \pkgoption{index} option should be used with the \fname{apacitex.bst} - \BibTeX{} style, although it does not give errors with \fname{apacite.bst}, + (or \fname{apacannx.bst}) + \BibTeX{} style, although it does not give errors with \fname{apacite.bst} + (or \fname{apacann.bst}), but simply does not give author index entries, so then this option typically does not have any effect (and an undesirable effect if it does). The \pkgoption{indexpackage} and \pkgoption{noindexpackage} @@ -1375,7 +1365,8 @@ mentioned. \centering \caption{List of fields that are used by the various reference types (blank = not used; \X{} = used; - \Y{} = used, but only for citations).} + \Y{} = used, but only for citations; \A{} = only used by + \pkg{apacann} and \pkg{apacannx}).} \label{tab:fieldref} \small \makebox[0pt]{% some manipulation to squeeze the table onto the page @@ -1405,7 +1396,8 @@ Field & literal\\ \hline address & &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ -annote & & & & & & & & & & \\ +annote &\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A\\ +annotate &\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A&\A\\ author &\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X&\X& \\ booktitle & & &\X& &\X& & & & & \\ chair & & & & & &\X& & & & \\ @@ -1672,10 +1664,12 @@ The following fields can be used to describe a reference in the for publishing'' can (must) the state and/or country description be omitted. - \item[\fieldname{annote}\LC] \mbox{}\\ - This is used in some annotated bibliography - styles. It is not used by \pkg{apacite}, but no warning - is given either. It is thus simply ignored. + \item[\fieldname{annote}\LC] + \item[\fieldname{annotate}\LC] \mbox{}\\ + These are used with the \pkg{apacann} and \pkg{apacannx} bibliography + styles to generate annotated bibliographies, see + section~\ref{sec:annotate}. They are simply ignored without warning by + the \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{apacitex} bibliography styles. \item[\fieldname{author}\LC] \mbox{}\\ The author(s) of the work. This may also be a corporate @@ -1777,12 +1771,13 @@ The following fields can be used to describe a reference in the This form is still supported, but \pkg{apacite} now also supports the form in which only the number is given: ``1'', ``2'', etc. If \pkg{apacite} detects that only a number is given, it inserts - ``\cmd{\PrintCardinal}\marg{number}'' in the \fname{.bbl} file. + ``\cmd{\PrintOrdinal}\marg{number}'' in the \fname{.bbl} file. This \LaTeX{} function converts the number again to ``1st'', etc. The advantage of this is that the same bibliography database can be - used for documents in different languages. At least in principle, - because language-specific versions of \cmd{\PrintCardinal} have - not yet been implemented in \pkg{apacite}. + used for documents in different languages: In the language-specific + (\fname{.apc}) files supplied with \pkg{apacite}, + \cmd{\PrintOrdinal} is redefined according to the document + language. \item[\fieldname{editor}\LC] \mbox{}\\ The editor(s) of a book, report, or special issue of a journal. @@ -1921,21 +1916,14 @@ The following fields can be used to describe a reference in the The month something was published. Mainly used for magazine or newspaper articles, lectures, and electronic documents. Use the month macros \verb+jan+, \verb+feb+, etc. These are - predefined strings in \fname{apacite.bst} and \fname{apacitex.bst}, - reverting to \verb+{\APACmonth{01}}+'', etc., with \verb+winter+, - \verb+spring+, \verb+summer+, and \verb+fall+ being 13--16. The - \cmd{\APACmonth} command translates the numbers to the month or + predefined strings in the \fname{.bst} files, reverting to + ``\verb+{\APACmonth{01}}+'', etc. You can also use the additional + macros \verb+winter+, \verb+spring+, \verb+summer+, and \verb+fall+, + which the \fname{.bst} files translate into + ``\verb+{\APACmonth{13}}+''--``\verb+{\APACmonth{16}}+''. + The \cmd{\APACmonth} command translates the numbers to the month or season names. This system allows language-specific behavior at - the \LaTeX{} stage, although \cmd{\APACmonth} has not yet been - defined for non-English languages. This will be done in a future - version of \pkg{apacite}. For the moment, you can easily do this - yourself, using the default in \fname{apacite.sty} as a template. - If desired, the macros can be overridden by using lines like -\begin{verbatim} -@string{jan = "januari"} -\end{verbatim} - at the top of your \fname{.bib} file, but it seems better to redefine - the \cmd{\APACmonth} command in your \LaTeX{} document. + the \LaTeX{} stage. \item[\fieldname{note}\LC] \mbox{}\\ A note. This puts additional information between parentheses @@ -2190,8 +2178,29 @@ Amsterdam: North-Holland. \fieldname{type} field. \item[\fieldname{url}] \mbox{}\\ - The web address of a web page. Used if the cited document (or - other work) is a web page or was obtained from a website. + The web address of a document. Used if the cited document (or + other work) is a website or was obtained from a website. Long + web addresses can cause problems, because \BibTeX{} splits long + lines (more than 80 characters) in the \fname{.bbl} file and inserts + a \TeX{} comment (percent sign). In most situations, this works fine, + because the percent sign ``hides'' the line break, which would be + processed as an undesired space by \TeX{}. But within the argument of + a \cmd{\url} command, a percent sign is copied to the output, because + it is a valid character in a URL. To prevent this problem, insert + line breaks and/or spaces in the URL in the \fname{.bib} file: +\begin{verbatim} + url = {ftp://ftp.princeton.edu/harnad/Psycoloquy/ + 2000.volume.11/psyc.00.11.001. + language-sex-chromosomes.1.crow}, +\end{verbatim} + Then \BibTeX{} breaks lines at the spaces/line breaks if a line + break in the output is considered necessary (but not otherwise). + These spaces are suppressed by default in the output, which is usually + the desired behavior. But see the \pkg{hyperref} and \pkg{url} + documentation if you want this differently. Also note that in the + \fieldname{url} field, special characters like `|%|' + and `|#|' should be entered without a backslash, unlike the normal + situation if they would be used in the text. \item[\fieldname{volume}\LC] \mbox{}\\ The volume or volumes of the referenced book(s) or @@ -2440,9 +2449,9 @@ the citations and reference list. similar, for works without a date. Their default definitions in \fname{apacite.sty} are \begin{verbatim} -\newcommand{\BCnt}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\theBibCnt} -\newcommand{\BCntIP}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}-\theBibCnt} -\newcommand{\BCntND}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}-\theBibCnt} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BCnt}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\theBibCnt} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BCntIP}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\theBibCnt}} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BCntND}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\theBibCnt}} \end{verbatim} \item[\cmd{\APACciteatitle}] The formatting of the title of an @@ -2792,7 +2801,7 @@ The following label commands are used: \label{sec:custom-big-formatting} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% In earlier versions of \pkg{apacite}, most of the formatting of the -reference list is done in the \BibTeX{} stage, i.e., by the \fname{.bst} +reference list was done in the \BibTeX{} stage, i.e., by the \fname{.bst} files. This corresponds with most other \BibTeX{} styles. This makes it difficult for users to customize the formatting of the reference list: They would have to make their own \fname{.bst} file, by adapting @@ -2811,9 +2820,9 @@ as discussed in sections~\ref{sec:custom-punct} and~\ref{subsec:labels} above. The amount of formatting thus handled has slightly grown over time, but still most choices were hard wired in the \BibTeX{} styles. -In the current version of \pkg{apacite}, a big step has been made in -transferring these choices to the \LaTeX{} domain. Hence, a much -larger set of commands, with wider-ranging scope, has been defined, +Since the \APACversiondate{2007/09/03} version of \pkg{apacite}, a big step +has been made in transferring these choices to the \LaTeX{} domain. Hence, +a much larger set of commands, with wider-ranging scope, has been defined, and considerably fewer choices are made at the \BibTeX{} stage. For example, \fname{apacite.bst} now inserts \mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ @@ -2857,24 +2866,22 @@ commands that accomplish the same (say, \cmd{\boldvolume}), so that the advantages will clearly outweigh the disadvantages for the vast majority of users. -Some packages (\pkg{amsrefs} and \pkg{biblatex} are the ones I am -aware of) handle the formatting of the reference list completely -in the \LaTeX{} domain, using \BibTeX{} only for sorting the reference -list. The current version of \pkg{apacite} does not go that far; -there are still certain choices that are hardwired in the \BibTeX{} -code. Examples are the ordering of the various blocks (most notably -the position of the year; some styles have this at the end) and the -formatting of names. It is doubtful whether \pkg{apacite} will follow -the path toward the end, like these other packages. Some formatting -choices are closely connected with sorting of entries (e.g., by title -if there is no author; this assumes that the title then takes the -author position) or other cross-entry relations (such as adding -`a' and `b' suffixes to the year). Therefore, it does not seem -useful to disconnect these choices by handing them over to \LaTeX. +Some packages (\pkg{amsrefs} and \pkg{biblatex} are the ones I am aware of) +handle the formatting of the reference list completely in the \LaTeX{} domain, +using \BibTeX{} only for sorting the reference list. The current version of +\pkg{apacite} does not go that far; there are still certain choices that are +hardwired in the \BibTeX{} code. Examples are the ordering of the various blocks +(most notably the position of the year; some styles have this at the end) and +the formatting of names. It is doubtful whether \pkg{apacite} will follow the +path toward the end, like these other packages. Some formatting choices are +closely connected with sorting of entries (e.g., by title if there is no author; +this assumes that the title then takes the author position) or other cross-entry +relations (such as adding `a' and `b' suffixes to the year). Therefore, it does +not seem useful to disconnect these choices by handing them over to \LaTeX. The following commands are currently implemented to format the reference list. If you want to customize them, you can study the source code in -the file \pkg{apacite.sty}, copy it to you own package file, and adapt +the file \fname{apacite.sty}, copy it to you own package file, and adapt the code as desired. \mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} @@ -2905,7 +2912,9 @@ In addition, the following environments are used: \mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ \begin{tabular}{@{}ll@{}} \envirname{APACrefURL} & Formatting of \fieldname{url} field \\ -\envirname{APACrefURLmsg} & Formatting of \fieldname{url} field for messages +\envirname{APACrefURLmsg} & Formatting of \fieldname{url} field for messages \\ +\envirname{APACrefannotation} & Formatting of \fieldname{annote} or + \fieldname{annotate} fields for annotated bibliographies. \end{tabular} \mbox{}\vspace{0.7\baselineskip}\\ It is likely that these lists will be expanded in future versions of @@ -3299,7 +3308,7 @@ i.e., web addresses. It is typically loaded if \pkg{hyperref} is also loaded, but it is very useful on its own as well. There are no compatibility problems with \pkg{apacite} and it is not required when using \pkg{apacite}. However, if you use the \fieldname{url} field, -\pkg{apacite} puts it into a \cmd{\url} command. If the \pkg{url} +\pkg{apacite} puts it into a \cmd{\url} command. If the \cmd{\url} command is not defined by another package, \pkg{apacite} provides a crude definition, so that no errors are generated. But the formatting thus obtained usually does not satisfy the APA rules about formatting, @@ -3308,7 +3317,9 @@ line breaking rules of the \pkg{url} package are fairly close to the APA rules, but there are some differences. Therefore, \pkg{apacite} provides several URL-styles that adhere to the APA line breaking rules, supplemented by the additional suggestions in -\citeA[p.~645]{chicago}. +\citeA[p.~645]{chicago}. These styles apply to URL formatting through the +\cmd{\url} command anywhere in the document, not only in the reference +list and not only in the \fieldname{url} field. The only difference between the URL styles defined by \pkg{apacite} is which font family they use: \verb+APACtt+ uses \cmd{\ttfamily}, @@ -3595,7 +3606,7 @@ the index somewhat. With (only) the \pkgoption{index} option, the indexing facility is turned on, but the \envirname{theindex} environment is not explicitly (re)defined by \pkg{apacite}. This means that this environment is defined just like in standard \LaTeX{}, or the \pkg{index} package, or some other package -that be loaded that redefines this environment. +that has been loaded that redefines this environment. The \pkgoption{stdindex} option explicitly uses the definition of the \envirname{theindex} environment that is defined in the \pkg{index} package @@ -3619,16 +3630,26 @@ time, followed by yet one or two more \LaTeX{} runs. The definitions of the index discussed apply to all indexes in the document, so to, e.g., the subject index as well as the author index. This may be -undesirable, and therefore future versions of \pkg{apacite} may contain -options or commands to switch index styles. In fact, this is done in the -current document (if you generate it with \cmd{\AlsoImplementation}), -using the \cmd{\APACdocindex} command defined in \fname{apacdoc.sty}. -In the absence of explicit options, if you want a different index style, -either for all indexes in your document or only for some indexes, you can -define such a style using the \cmd{\renewenvironment} command in the -appropriate place. See the standard \LaTeX{} documentation for this -command. You can use the source code of the \pkg{index} package, or -the \pkg{apacite} source code for that matter, as a template. +undesirable, and therefore \pkg{apacite} provides the following commands +to switch index styles: +\begin{description} + \item[\cmd{\APACstdindex}] + \item[\cmd{\APACtocindex}] + \item[\cmd{\APACemindex}] + \item[\cmd{\APACltxemindex}] +\end{description} +These correspond to the package options \pkgoption{stdindex}, +\pkgoption{tocindex}, \pkgoption{emindex}, and \pkgoption{ltxemindex}, +respectively. Note, however, that the \pkgoption{ltxemindex} option and/or the +\cmd{\APACltxemindex} command generally cannot be used in a document that uses +one of the other styles, and vice versa, because the way \pkg{index} works is +incompatible with how standard \LaTeX{} indexing works. + +If you want a different index style, either for all indexes in your document or +only for some indexes, you can define such a style using the +\cmd{\renewenvironment} command in the appropriate place. See the standard +\LaTeX{} documentation for this command. The source code of the four commands +mentioned here can be used as a template for such a style definition. Finally, some elements of the formatting of the index itself can be changed by using (and/or writing) an \fname{.ist} file containing the preferred @@ -3762,7 +3783,7 @@ is incorrect. Instead, if we copy them literally, key = {{NIMH}\corporateAX{nationalinstituteofmentalhealth @{\bibcorporate{National Institute of Mental Health}}}}, \end{verbatim} -then evrything is as desired. The additional spaces before the ``\verb+@+'' +then everything is as desired. The additional spaces before the ``\verb+@+'' sign make no difference, but percentage signs should not be included in the \fname{.bib} file at the end of lines to hide a line break (as in \LaTeX{}), because \BibTeX{} does not recognize the percentage sign as @@ -3776,6 +3797,46 @@ locations (e.g., in the middle of a command name or in the argument of a \cmd{url} command), but is still a possibility. %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +\section{Annotated bibliographies} +\label{sec:annotate} +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +Annotated bibliographies can be obtained by requesting +\begin{verbatim} +\bibliographystyle{apacann} +\end{verbatim} +instead of +\begin{verbatim} +\bibliographystyle{apacite} +\end{verbatim} +or +\begin{verbatim} +\bibliographystyle{apacannx} +\end{verbatim} +instead of +\begin{verbatim} +\bibliographystyle{apacitex} +\end{verbatim} +The \BibTeX{} style files \fname{apacann.bst} and \fname{apacannx.bst} are +almost identical to \fname{apacite.bst} and \fname{apacitex.bst}, respectively. +The only relevant difference is that these styles include the contents of the +\fieldname{annote} or \fieldname{annotate} field in the output, thereby +generating an annotated bibliography. + +According to \citeA[pp.~810--811]{TLC2}, the \pkg{annotation} style uses the +\fieldname{annote} field for annotations, whereas the \pkg{annotate} style +defines the \fieldname{annotate} field for this purpose. To be compatible with +both, \pkg{apacann} and \pkg{apacannx} support both of these fields. However, +they are not both included in the output for the same reference, in case +someone wants to make a file that is compatible with both the \pkg{annotate} +and \pkg{annotation} styles and thus duplicates the information. In such a case, +the contents of the \fieldname{annote} field is included in the output. + +The annotation is inserted in the \fname{.bbl} file within a +\envirname{APACrefannotation} environment. Hence, its formatting can be +changed by the user by redefining this environment. + + +%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% \section{\fname{apacdoc.sty}} \label{sec:apacdoc} %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% @@ -4100,18 +4161,31 @@ like to do with \pkg{apacite} follows below. Several items of this list are the direct result of the tricks I had to use for the examples in section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below. \begin{itemize} +\item Support \pkg{natbib} citation commands (\cmd{\citet}, \cmd{\citep}, + etc.). +\item Redefine citation commands (and other commands) as ``robust'' commands + so that they can be used in other commands, such as \cmd{\caption}, + without having to use an explicit \cmd{\protect}. + The \pkg{natbib} package does this, but \pkg{apacite} still adheres + to the older ``fragile'' setup of its predecessors. \item Sort entries within a single citation command. The \pkg{natbib} package already offers this option. \item Swap (optionally) the order of closing quotes and various other punctuation marks (\verb+.,;!?+) in a citation, for articles where there is no named author and the title (between quotes) takes the role of the author. -\item If a work is authored by someone, ``with'' someone else: This - currently must be tricked in a nonelegant way. Perhaps I (or you) - can think of a better solution. -\item Support nonstandard types of authors, like ``Director'' and - ``Series Ed.\hbox{}''. This currently must be tricked in a - nonelegant way. Perhaps I (or you) can think of a better solution. +\item Add an option that disables \pkg{apacite}'s citation commands (and + perhaps a few others) to further improve inter-operability with + \pkg{natbib}. +\item Add options and/or commands for easier customization of reference + list and author index. +\item Continue with transferring reference list formatting code from + \BibTeX{} to \LaTeX. +\item Introduce options for the \BibTeX{} part, e.g., index vs.\ noindex (so + that \fname{apacitex.bst} becomes superfluous); full first names + instead of only initials, or perhaps options for putting initials + in front of (2nd and later) author names; unsorted reference lists + or lists sorted chronologically (forward or reverse; for CVs); etc. \item Give explicit support for citation to the Bible and other ``classic'' works and the \emph{DSM}. \item Give explicit support for music recordings in \entryname{incollection} @@ -4119,30 +4193,44 @@ section~\ref{sec:xmpl} below. \item Perhaps study referencing legal materials (Appendix~D of the APA manual). This is actually not high on my priority list. Perhaps you can use the \pkg{camel} package if you do this often. +\item Fix a bug (which is unlikely to show up) in the \fname{.bst} file: + If there are two or more references, published in the same year, each + with 6 authors, the first 5 of which are the same but the 6th authors + are different, then these lead to ambiguous citations. The same thing + happens when one has 6 authors and another 7, with the same first 6 + authors. +\item Extend the \cmd{\bibcorporate} command with an optional argument that + gives the abbreviated form, so that the \fieldname{firstkey} and + \fieldname{key} fields do not have to be used for this common situation. +\item Support nonstandard types of authors, like ``Director'' and + ``Series Ed.\hbox{}''. This currently must be tricked in a + nonelegant way. Perhaps I (or you) can think of a better solution. +\item If a work is authored by someone, ``with'' someone else: This + currently must be tricked in a nonelegant way. Perhaps I (or you) + can think of a better solution. \item Define \BibTeX{} macros or strings for commonly encountered journals (at least the APA journals). -\item Support \pkg{natbib} citation commands (\cmd{\citet}, \cmd{\citep}, - etc.). -\item Improve and extend language support. Most importantly, make sure that - all the \fname{.apc} files support all the new commands with possibly - language-specific code. -\item Continue with transferring reference list formatting code from - \BibTeX{} to \LaTeX. -\item Add options and/or commands for easier customization of reference - list and author index. -\item Introduce options for the \BibTeX{} part, e.g., index vs.\ noindex (so - that \fname{apacitex.bst} becomes superfluous); full first names - instead of only initials, or perhaps options for putting initials - in front of (2nd and later) author names; unsorted reference lists - or lists sorted chronologically (forward or reverse; for CVs); etc. +\item In an \entryname{unpublished} entry, if \fieldname{author} and + \fieldname{organization} are equivalent, replace the latter with + ``Author'' in the output, analogous to the situation where + \fieldname{publisher} or \fieldname{institution} are equal to + \fieldname{author} in several of the other entry types. +\item Allow \fieldname{lastchecked} fields of the form |2009-02-01| and/or + |2009/02/01| and/or other schemes, and translate these into + language-specific date strings. +\item Perhaps study the 24-page electronic document + \APACcitebtitle{APA Style Guide to Electronic References}, + see \url{http://books.apa.org/books.cfm?id=4210509}, and incorporate + my findings in the next version of \pkg{apacite}. +\item Rewrite and reorganize the documentation; perhaps create a ``getting + started'' document. +\item Transform the examples section below into a test document. (You can + already extract its contents from the file \fname{apacite.dtx} and + copy it into a \fname{.tex} file for this purpose, but you'll have + to edit a few things in and out.) \item Improve the source code documentation, esp.\ the formatting, indexing, and cross-referencing. (You only see this if you regenerate this manual with the \cmd{\AlsoImplementation} flag set.) -\item The APA has recently (June 2007) published the 24-page electronic - document \APACcitebtitle{APA Style Guide to Electronic References}, - see \url{http://books.apa.org/books.cfm?id=4210509} I will - probably purchase this and study it, and incorporate my findings - in the next version of \pkg{apacite}. \end{itemize} Quite likely, other problems will come up when using the current version of \pkg{apacite}, but at least I got it working on the APA manual examples, see @@ -4657,9 +4745,9 @@ short form, of the examples. postfixes (through \verb+<...>+ and \verb+[...]+) are not available. Note also that the edition should be spelled out as ``\verb+4th ed.\hbox{}+''. When I experimented with - just ``\verb+4+'', trying to use the \cmd{\PrintCardinal} + just ``\verb+4+'', trying to use the \cmd{\PrintOrdinal} function, things went terribly wrong. Even if I put - \verb+\PrintCardinal{4}+ in the \fieldname{key} field, it + \verb+\PrintOrdinal{4}+ in the \fieldname{key} field, it didn't work. Finally, the ``ed.\hbox{}'' must be added to allow reference to the ``3rd ed., rev.\hbox{}'' and the ``4th ed., text rev.\hbox{}'' as well. @@ -5228,10 +5316,10 @@ short form, of the examples. % The following sections describe the source code of the various % constituent parts of \pkg{apacite}. % - % % \section{\LaTeX\ package (\fname{apacite.sty})} -% This is the \LaTeX\ package part of \pkg{apacite}. +% This is the \LaTeX\ package part of \pkg{apacite}. We start with some +% comments at the top of the package to recognize borrowed code. % % \begin{macrocode} %<*package> @@ -5254,1342 +5342,247 @@ short form, of the examples. %% and code (used with permission) provided by: %% Stefan Bj\"ork. %% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Default. The ``old'' version -%%% \def\@year@\BCAY#1#2#3{#3} -%%% cannot exist jointly with this, so has to be moved to an option. -\def\@year@\citeauthoryear#1#2#3{#3} - -\DeclareOption{BCAY}{% kept for compatibility with old versions +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Options} +% +% ^^A There does not appear to be a \cmd{\DescribeOption} command. +% +% \subsubsection{Backwards compatibility} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@year@} +% The \pkg{theapa} package used the \cmd{\BCAY} command where \pkg{newapa} +% used \cmd{\citeauthoryear} for the same purpose. Because the first version +% of \pkg{apacite} descended from \pkg{theapa}, it used \cmd{\BCAY} as well. +% However, \pkg{natbib} does not recognize \cmd{\BCAY}, but it does +% recognize \cmd{\citeauthoryear}. Therefore, since +% \APACversiondate{2003/09/05}, \pkg{apacite} uses \cmd{\citeauthoryear}. +% Unfortunately, the construction below can only be defined for one of them. +% Therefore, this is a backwards compatibility option. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@year@\citeauthoryear#1#2#3{#3} % default +\DeclareOption{BCAY}{% compatibility with old .bbl files \def\@year@\BCAY#1#2#3{#3}% } -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -%%%%%% No Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -% The \if is necessary because packages can not be required here, so -% we must handle the consequences of the index and noindex options -% later. +% \subsubsection{Author indexing} % +% \begin{macro}{\if@APAC@index} +% No author index. +%% ^^A \cmd{\if} somehow gives an error +% The |\if| is necessary because packages can not be required here, so +% we must handle the consequences of the index and noindex options later. +% \begin{macrocode} \newif\if@APAC@index \DeclareOption{noindex}{\@APAC@indexfalse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -%%%%%% End No Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -%%%%%% Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% +% Request author index. +% \begin{macrocode} \DeclareOption{index}{\@APAC@indextrue}% +% \end{macrocode} % -%%%%%% End Author Index option %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -%%%%%% Include Corporate Authors in index? %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% Use an \if here, the real definitions are handled within the -% index options. -% +% \begin{macro}{\if@APAC@include@corporate} +% Include corporate authors in index? +%% ^^A \cmd{\if} somehow gives an error +% Use an |\if| here, the real definitions are handled within the index +% options. +% \begin{macrocode} \newif\if@APAC@include@corporate \DeclareOption{includecorporate}{\@APAC@include@corporatetrue}% \DeclareOption{suppresscorporate}{\@APAC@include@corporatefalse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -%%%%%% End Corporate Author options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -%%%%%% Use index package or standard LaTeX index? %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% Use an \if here, the real definitions are handled within the -% index options. -% +% \begin{macro}{\if@APAC@index@package} +% Use \pkg{index} package or standard \LaTeX\ index? Again, we only define the +% boolean. +% \begin{macrocode} \newif\if@APAC@index@package \DeclareOption{indexpackage}{\@APAC@index@packagetrue}% \DeclareOption{noindexpackage}{\@APAC@index@packagefalse}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -%%%%%% End index package options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - - -%%%%%% Modifications of Author Index %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% -%% Standard index: from the index package +% \begin{environment}{index} +% Some options for changing the \envirname{index} environment. The actual +% definitions are done through macros below; here these macros are used. +% +% The first option uses the definition from the \pkg{index} package +% |[1995/09/28 v4.1beta Improved index support (dmj)]|, +% which is the same code as in |(v3.02, 15 September 1993)|, +% i.e., without table of contents entry. +% \begin{macrocode} \DeclareOption{stdindex}{% - %% - %% Index style as defined in the index package - %% [1995/09/28 v4.1beta Improved index support (dmj)], - %% which is the same code as in (v3.02, 15 September 1993), - %% i.e., without table of contents entry. - %% - \ExecuteOptions{index}% - %% - %% This option requires the index package - \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}% - %% - \AtEndOfPackage{% - \@ifclassloaded{article}{% - \renewenvironment{theindex}{% - \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}% - \if@twocolumn - \@restonecolfalse - \else - \@restonecoltrue - \fi - \columnseprule \z@ - \columnsep 35\p@ - \twocolumn[% - \section*{\indexname}% - \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else - \index@prologue - \bigskip - \fi - ]% - \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% - {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% - \thispagestyle{plain}% - \parindent\z@ - \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax - \let\item\@idxitem - }{% - \if@restonecol - \onecolumn - \else - \clearpage - \fi - } - }{% - \renewenvironment{theindex}{% - \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}% - \if@twocolumn - \@restonecolfalse - \else - \@restonecoltrue - \fi - \columnseprule \z@ - \columnsep 35\p@ - \twocolumn[% - \@makeschapterhead{\indexname}% - \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else - \index@prologue - \bigskip - \fi - ]% - \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% - {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% - \thispagestyle{plain}% - \parindent\z@ - \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax - \let\item\@idxitem - }{% - \if@restonecol - \onecolumn - \else - \clearpage - \fi - }% - }% - }% + \ExecuteOptions{index}% Request author index + \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}% This option requires the index package + \AtEndOfPackage{\APACstdindex}% index environment as in index package }% -% +% \end{macrocode} +% The next option adds a table of contents entry to the standard index. +% \begin{macrocode} \DeclareOption{tocindex}{% - %% - %% Index style as with the stdindex option, but with an - %% added table of contents entry. - %% - \ExecuteOptions{index}% - %% - %% This option requires the index package - \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}% - %% - \AtEndOfPackage{% - \@ifclassloaded{article}{% - \renewenvironment{theindex}{% - \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}% - \if@twocolumn - \@restonecolfalse - \else - \@restonecoltrue - \fi - \columnseprule \z@ - \columnsep 35\p@ - \twocolumn[% - \section*{\indexname}% - \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else - \index@prologue - \bigskip - \fi - ]% - \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% - {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% - % - % the following line added by EM - \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\indexname}% - % - \thispagestyle{plain}% - \parindent\z@ - \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax - \let\item\@idxitem - }{% - \if@restonecol - \onecolumn - \else - \clearpage - \fi - } - }{% - \renewenvironment{theindex}{% - \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}% - \if@twocolumn - \@restonecolfalse - \else - \@restonecoltrue - \fi - \columnseprule \z@ - \columnsep 35\p@ - \twocolumn[% - \@makeschapterhead{\indexname}% - \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else - \index@prologue - \bigskip - \fi - ]% - \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% - {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% - % - % the following line added by EM - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}% - % - \thispagestyle{plain}% - \parindent\z@ - \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax - \let\item\@idxitem - }{% - \if@restonecol - \onecolumn - \else - \clearpage - \fi - }% - }% - }% -} -% + \ExecuteOptions{index}% Request author index + \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}% This option requires the index package + \AtEndOfPackage{\APACtocindex}% index environment as in index package + %% with toc entry added +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% This option defines my (EM) own favorite index style. Maybe you like it too. +% \begin{macrocode} \DeclareOption{emindex}{% - %% - %% My (EM) own favorite index style. Maybe you like it too. - %% - \ExecuteOptions{index}% - %% - %% This option requires the index package - \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}% - %% - \AtEndOfPackage{% - %% - %% Redefine theindex such that automatically a chapter or section - %% title is generated, with a corresponding table of contents - %% entry. theindex is now in multicol environment. - %% - \RequirePackage{multicol} - \renewenvironment{theindex}{% - \edef\@indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}% - \@ifundefined{chapter}% - {\section*{\@indexname}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\@indexname}% - }% - {\chapter*{\@indexname}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@indexname}% - }% - \@mkboth{{\@indexname}}{{\@indexname}}% do we need this? - \parindent\z@ - \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax - \let\item\@idxitem - \setlength{\columnsep}{2em} - \small - \begin{multicols}{2} - \raggedright - }% - {\end{multicols}\normalsize - }% - }% + \ExecuteOptions{index}% Request author index + \ExecuteOptions{indexpackage}% This option requires the index package + \AtEndOfPackage{\APACemindex}% EM's index environment (see below) }% -% +% \end{macrocode} +% The next option is a variation on the \pkgoption{emindex} option, but uses +% standard \LaTeX\ code (adapted from the \pkg{ltxdoc} class) instead of the +% the \pkg{index} package to support multiple indexes. +% \begin{macrocode} \DeclareOption{ltxemindex}{% - %% - %% Variation on emindex, without the `index' package - %% - \ExecuteOptions{index}% - %% - %% This option drops the index package - \ExecuteOptions{noindexpackage}% - %% - \AtEndOfPackage{% - %% - %% Redefine theindex such that automatically a chapter or section - %% title is generated, with a corresponding table of contents - %% entry. theindex is now in multicol environment. - %% - \RequirePackage{multicol} - \renewenvironment{theindex}{% - % The index naming scheme of the `index' package is also absent, - % therefore try to guess an index name. - \@ifundefined{currentindexname}{% - \@ifundefined{indexname}{% - \edef\@indexname{Index}% - }{\edef\@indexname{\indexname}}% - }{\edef\@indexname{\currentindexname}}% - \@ifundefined{chapter}% - {\section*{\@indexname}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\@indexname}% - }% - {\chapter*{\@indexname}% - \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@indexname}% - }% - \@mkboth{{\@indexname}}{{\@indexname}}% do we need this? - \def\pfill{\relax{}}% - \parindent\z@ - \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax - \let\item\@idxitem - \setlength{\columnsep}{2em} - \small - \begin{multicols}{2} - \raggedright - }% - {\end{multicols}\normalsize - }% - }% + \ExecuteOptions{index}% Request author index + \ExecuteOptions{noindexpackage}% Don't use the index package + \AtEndOfPackage{\APACltxemindex}% EM's index environment without the index + %% package (see below) } -%%%%%% End Modifications of Author Index %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - - -%%%%%% Some options for the bibliography %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} % +% \subsubsection{Bibliography} +% +% Various options for changing the formatting of the reference list. Most of +%% ^^A \cmd{\if} somehow gives an error +% these are again implemented through |\if| commands, deferring the +% actual implementation. +% \begin{macro}{\if@numberedbib} +% Should the bibliography section or chapter be numbered? +% \begin{macrocode} \newif\if@numberedbib -\DeclareOption{numberedbib}{% - % - % The bibliography is a section or chapter with a number (e.g., - % section 6 or chapter 10). I think this does not work (i.e., it is - % still unnumbered) when the section/chapter is in the backmatter. - % - \@numberedbibtrue -} - -\DeclareOption{unnumberedbib}{% - % - % The bibliography is a section or chapter without a number (i.e., - % a section* or chapter*). This is the default. - % - \@numberedbibfalse -} - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% The bibliography is a section or chapter with a number (e.g., +% section~6 or chapter~10). This does not work properly when the section or +% chapter is in the backmatter. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{numberedbib}{\@numberedbibtrue} +% \end{macrocode} +% The bibliography is a section or chapter without a number (i.e., +% a section* or chapter*). This is the default. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{unnumberedbib}{\@numberedbibfalse} +% \end{macrocode} +% The next options determine whether the bibliography should be a section or +% a chapter. +% \begin{macro}{\if@sectionbib} +% With the \pkgoption{sectionbib} option, the bibliography is a section. This +% is typically used with the \pkg{chapterbib} package; then each chapter has a +% bibliography section. The \pkgoption{nosectionbib} option makes the +% bibliography a chapter (if chapters are defined). If none of these options +% are requested, \pkg{apacite} tries to guess the most logical choice. The +% bibliography is a section if chapters are not defined or if we are in the +% ``mainmatter'' of a document. Otherwise, i.e., in the ``backmatter'' of a +% document that has chapters, it is a chapter. +% \begin{macrocode} \DeclareOption{sectionbib}{% - % - % The bibliography is a section. Typically used with the chapterbib - % package, then each chapter has a bibliography section. The - % nosectionbib option makes the bibliography a chapter (if chapters - % are defined). If none of these options are requested, apacite tries - % to guess the most logical choice. The bibliography is a section if - % chapters are not defined or if we are in the ``mainmatter'' of a - % document. Otherwise, it is a chapter. - % \@ifundefined{@sectionbibtrue}{\newif\if@sectionbib}{}% - % \@sectionbibtrue } - \DeclareOption{nosectionbib}{% - % - % The bibliography is a chapter if chapters are defined - % (otherwise, it is always a section). See the description - % of the sectionbib option above for its usage. - % \@ifundefined{@sectionbibfalse}{\newif\if@sectionbib}{}% - % \@sectionbibfalse } - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@tocbib} +% These options determine whether the bibliography should be in the table of +% contents. +% \begin{macrocode} \newif\if@tocbib -\DeclareOption{tocbib}{% - % - % The bibliography in the table of contents, even if it's - % unnumbered. This is the default. - % - \@tocbibtrue -} - -\DeclareOption{notocbib}{% - % - % The bibliography not in the table of contents if it's - % unnumbered. (Will be ignored if it's numbered.) - % - \@tocbibfalse -} - -\DeclareOption{bibnewpage}{% - % - % The bibliography is started on a new page if it's a section. - % (Will be ignored if it's a chapter.) - % - \def\@bibnewpage{\bibnewpage} -} - -\DeclareOption{nobibnewpage}{% - % - % The bibliography is started on the same page if it's a section. - % (Will be ignored if it's a chapter.) - % - \let\@bibnewpage\relax -} - - -%%%%%% End options for the bibliography %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -%%%%%% Obsolete hyperref compatibility options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \end{macrocode} +% The bibliography in the table of contents, even if it's unnumbered. This is +% the default. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{tocbib}{\@tocbibtrue} +% \end{macrocode} +% The bibliography not in the table of contents if it's unnumbered. This is +% ignored if it's numbered. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{notocbib}{\@tocbibfalse} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@bibnewpage} +% Start the bibliography on a new page? This is ignored if it's a chapter. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareOption{bibnewpage}{\def\@bibnewpage{\bibnewpage}} +\DeclareOption{nobibnewpage}{\let\@bibnewpage\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -% (For compatibility with previous versions of apacite.) +% \subsubsection{Obsolete compatibility options} % +% For compatibility with older versions of \pkg{apacite}. +% \begin{macrocode} \DeclareOption{hyper}{% \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `hyper' ignored}% } \DeclareOption{nohyper}{% \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `nohyper' ignored}% } -%%%%%% End obsolete hyperref compatibility options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -%%%%%% Obsolete accentfix options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% (For compatibility with previous versions of apacite.) -% \DeclareOption{accentfix}{% \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `accentfix' ignored}% } \DeclareOption{noaccentfix}{% \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{Obsolete option `noaccentfix' ignored}% } -%%%%%% End obsolete accentfix options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - - -%%%%%% Execute default options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \end{macrocode} % +% \subsection{Option processing} +% +% Execute default options. +% \begin{macrocode} \ExecuteOptions{noindex,indexpackage,unnumberedbib,tocbib,% nobibnewpage,suppresscorporate} - -%%%%%% Execute user-requested options %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% +% \end{macrocode} +% Execute user-requested options. +% \begin{macrocode} \ProcessOptions - -%%%%%% Define author indexing stuff when requested -% -\newcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index} -\if@APAC@index - % - % Author index requested. - % - \if@APAC@index@package - % - % Load \pkg{index} package. - \RequirePackage{index}[1995/09/28] - % - % Define Author Index. - % This may be changed in the preamble of the - % document (or in a user-provided package) - % by a \renewindex command. - % - \newindex{autx}{adx}{and}{\authorindexname} - % - % Author indexing command - % - \DeclareRobustCommand{\AX}[1]{% - \if@filesw{% - \protected@write\@auxout{}{% - \string\protected@write\string\tf@autx{}{% - \string\string\string - \indexentry{\string#1|hyperpage}{\thepage}}}% - }% - \fi - }% - \else - % - % Without \pkg{index} package (experimental). - % A bit of code adapted from ltidxglo.dtx - \newwrite\@AXfile - \immediate\openout\@AXfile=\jobname.adx - \typeout - {Writing author index file \jobname.adx }% - % - \DeclareRobustCommand{\AX}[1]{% - \protected@write\@AXfile{}% - {\string\indexentry{\string#1}{\thepage}}% - }% - % - % Some code adapted from doc.dtx - \def\PrintAX{\edef\currentindexname{\authorindexname}% - \@input@{\jobname.and}% - \global\let\PrintAX\@empty - }% - % - % Do some hacking to make sure both \printindex and \printindex[autx] are defined - % As yet untested. - \AtBeginDocument{% - % Make sure \printindex is defined. - \@ifundefined{printindex}{\makeindex}{}% - % Now, redefine \printindex to accommodate both \printindex and \printindex[autx] - \let\orig@printindex\printindex - \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\APAC@printindex}{% - \orig@printindex}}% - % - \def\APAC@printindex[autx]{\PrintAX}% - }% - \fi - % - % Index corporate authors? - \if@APAC@include@corporate - % Include corporate authors in index. - \let\corporateAX\AX - \else - % Swallow argument (do not index). - \let\corporateAX\@gobble - \fi - % -\else - % - % No author index. - % - % Wait till \begin{document} for checking whether another - % package is loaded that defines \printindex. - % - \AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifundefined{printindex}% - {%% \printindex not defined. Define \printindex so that it - % suppresses the indexes. - \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{% - \check@printindex[]}}% - % - \def\check@printindex[#1]{\relax }% - }% - {% \printindex defined, so save its definition. - \let\orig@printindex\printindex - % - % Redefine \printindex so that it suppresses the author index - % but does not change other indexes. - % 1. If there is no optional argument, use the original - % definition. - \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{\orig@printindex}}% - % - % 2. If there is an optional argument, check whether it is - % equal to `autx'. If so, suppress this (author) index. - % If not, use the original definition. - \def\check@printindex[#1]{% - % Use a clumsy way to check whether #1 = autx - % but seemingly more elegant ways somehow didn't work. - \expandafter\def\csname APAC@#1\endcsname{DUMMY}% - \@ifundefined{APAC@autx}% - {\orig@printindex[#1]}% - {\let\APAC@autx\@undefined}% - }% - }% - }% - % - % Empty author indexing commands - % - \let\AX\@gobble - \let\corporateAX\@gobble - % -\fi - - -%%%%%% Chapterbib compatibility %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% From the instructions of the chapterbib package. - -\@ifundefined{@extra@b@citeb}{\def\@extra@b@citeb{}}{} -\gdef\@extra@binfo{} - -%%%%%% End Chapterbib compatibility %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. -%%% These are recognized by apacite.bst. -\newcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg} -\newcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computer program} -\newcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Computer program manual} -\newcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computer program and manual} -\newcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computer software} -\newcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Computer software manual} -\newcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computer software and manual} -\newcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programming language} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Command for corporate authors. -%%% This is recognized by apacite.bst. -\let\bibcorporate\relax - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% The following commands are recognized by apacite.bst. -%%% They denote that the publication date is unknown, -%%% and that the type should be left empty (for @techreport, where -%%% ``Tech. Rep.'' is the default type if the field is left empty). -\newcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}} -\newcommand{\bibnotype}{} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% cite punctuations % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -% text style of authors in-text citation -% (\cite, \shortcite, \fullcite, -% \citeA, \shortciteA, \fullciteA, -% \citeNP, \shortciteNP, \fullciteNP) -\newcommand{\BAstyle}{}% - -% text style of authors in-text citation -% (\citeauthor, \shortciteauthor, \fullciteauthor) -\newcommand{\BAastyle}{}% - -\newcommand{\BBOP}{(} % open parenthesis -\newcommand{\BBCP}{)} % closing parenthesis -\newcommand{\BAP}{ } % after prefix, before first citation -\newcommand{\BBAA}{\&} % between authors in parentheses and ref. sec. -\newcommand{\BBAB}{and} % between authors in text -\newcommand{\BBAY}{, } % between author(s) and year -\newcommand{\BBYY}{, } % between years of multiple citations with same author -\newcommand{\BBC}{; } % between cites -\newcommand{\BBN}{, } % before note -\newcommand{\BBOQ}{} % open quote for article title -\newcommand{\BBCQ}{} % closing quote for article title -% -\newcommand{\BCBT}{,} % comma between authors in ref. sec - % when no. of authors = 2 -\newcommand{\BCBL}{,} % comma before last author -\newcommand{\BAnd}{\&} % for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list -\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials -\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials -% -\newcommand{\BBA}{\BBAA} -% -\let\Bem\emph - -\newcommand{\APACciteatitle}[1]{``#1''}% Format as article title in text -\newcommand{\APACcitebtitle}[1]{{\em #1\/}}% Format as book title in text -\newcommand{\APACSortNoop}[1]{} % Can be used to change the sorting order: - % When put between a pair of braces at the - % front of a field, the entry is sorted on - % the argument of this command, but the - % argument is never displayed. - -% Two commands that are used to trick natbib. -\newcommand{\APACyear}[1]{{#1}}% -\newcommand{\APACexlab}[1]{{#1}}% - -% -% For multiple citations with same author-year. -% (Kruskal, 1964a, 1964b) -% The \protect is necessary when natbib is used. -% -\newcounter{BibCnt} -\renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{\alph{BibCnt}} -\newcommand{\BCnt}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\protect\theBibCnt} -% -% In press, no date. -% The \mbox prevents a line break at the hyphen. -% -\newcommand{\BCntIP}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\protect\theBibCnt}} -\newcommand{\BCntND}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\protect\theBibCnt}} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Labels, mostly for reference list % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -% ``others'', the argument contains a dot to suppress an additional one -% in the reference list. Here and in other cases, the \hbox{} ensures that -% TeX does not mistake the abbreviation period for a sentence-ending period. -\newcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}} -% ``others'', the argument contains a dot to suppress an additional one -% in the reference list. The difference with \BOthers is that, if another -% string is used to define \BOthers, this one should always finish with a -% period and the previous one not necessarily (e.g., if explicit ``others'' -% is used). -\newcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}} -\newcommand{\BIP}{in press} % used as year for in-press citations -\newcommand{\BIn}{In} % for ``In '' editor... -\newcommand{\Bby}{by} % for ``by '' editor... (in reprints) -\newcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}} % chapter -\newcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}} % chapters -\newcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}} % editor -\newcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}} % editors -\newcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.\hbox{}} % translator -\newcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.\hbox{}} % translators -\newcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.\hbox{}} % translation, for the year field -\newcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair} % chair of symposium -\newcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs} % chairs -\newcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}} % volume -\newcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}} % volumes -\newcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}} % number -\newcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}} % numbers -\newcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}} % edition -\newcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}} % page -\newcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}} % pages -\newcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}} % (default) technical report type name -\newcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation}% (default) PhD thesis type name -% (default) unpublished PhD thesis type name -\newcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation} -\newcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis} % (default) master's thesis type name -% (default) unpublished master's thesis type name -\newcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis} -\newcommand{\BAuthor}{Author} % Used if publisher = author -\newcommand{\BOWP}{Original work published} -\newcommand{\BREPR}{Reprinted from} -\newcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Available from\ }% Websites; note the space. -\newcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Retrieved {#1}, from\ }% Websites; note the space. -\newcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Message posted to\ }% Messages; note the space. -% -\def\refname{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. -\def\bibname{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. -% -% An optional note just before the references in the reference list. -% Defaults to nothing, but can be changed to a list of commands -% (e.g., if author formatting should be different in the reference -% list) and/or text (e.g., for an explanatory note). -% -\newcommand{\bibliographyprenote}{} - -% -% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list -% when a meta-analysis is reported. -% -\newcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% - References marked with an asterisk indicate studies - included in the meta-analysis.} -% -% The star that's put in front of the entries used in the meta-analysis -% -\newcommand{\APACmetastar}{\ensuremath{{}^\ast}} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Load language dependent sections from an external file. -% (Based on code by Stefan Bj\"ork, 2004/12/25.) -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\AtBeginDocument{% - % - % Both babel and (n)german use \iflanguage to check the main - % language. They both also use \languagename, but that gives - % more problems with dialects. E.g., if \languagename = austrian - % then \iflanguage{german}{Yes}{No} gives Yes. This allows us - % to provide only .apc files for the language class without - % complicated code to check whether a certain dialect is used. - % - % Check whether \iflanguage is defined. If not, no language support - % is offered. - % - \@ifundefined{iflanguage}% - {\relax }% - {% % - % My teTeX under Cygwin automatically loads babel with - % default language "nohyphenation", so this language should - % revert to doing nothing. Strangely enough \iflanguage - % does not work correctly, so I'll use a trick. (Some trial - % and error, because babel.dtx states that there must be - % a '\string ' before the 'nohyphenation', but apparently in - % this situation it's the other way around.) - % - \edef\APAC@tmp{nohyphenation}% - \ifx\languagename\APAC@tmp - \else - \InputIfFileExists{\languagename.apc}{}{% - % - % \languagename.apc does not exist; try whether the current - % language is a dialect of one of the known languages. This - % is not perfect, because languages for which no hyphenation - % patterns have been found revert to the default language, - % so that the wrong language file may be loaded here in that - % case. - % - % Define a modification of \iflanguage that executes the "true" - % code if the language is defined and equal to the current - % language and does nothing otherwise. (Just \iflanguage gives - % an error if the language is not loaded.) - % - \def\APAC@iflang##1##2{% - \expandafter\ifx\csname l@##1\endcsname\relax - \else - \ifnum\csname l@##1\endcsname=\language - {##2}% - \fi - \fi - }% - % Define language support file. The \def instead of a direct \input - % is done to provide a mechanism to check whether a language file - % has been defined. - % - \APAC@iflang{dutch}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{dutch.apc}}% - \APAC@iflang{finnish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{finnish.apc}}% - \APAC@iflang{german}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{german.apc}}% - \APAC@iflang{ngerman}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{ngerman.apc}}% - \APAC@iflang{greek}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{greek.apc}}% - \APAC@iflang{norsk}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{norsk.apc}}% - \APAC@iflang{spanish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{spanish.apc}}% - \APAC@iflang{swedish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{swedish.apc}}% - % - % The default English as last one. - \APAC@iflang{english}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{english.apc}}% - % - \@ifundefined{APAC@apcfile}{% - \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{% - No suitable language definition file (\languagename.apc) found}% - }{% - \InputIfFileExists{\APAC@apcfile}{}{% - \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{% - Language definition file \APAC@apcfile\space not found}% - }% - }% - \let\APAC@apcfile\@undefined - }% - \fi - \let\APAC@tmp\@undefined - }% - \let\APAC@iflang\@undefined -} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Bibliography style parameters. -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\def\bibnewpage{\clearpage}% apa.cls uses \newpage, change with \renewcommand -\let\bibliographytypesize\normalsize -% -%%% declare four parameters -\newskip{\bibleftmargin} -\newskip{\bibindent} -\newskip{\bibparsep} -\newskip{\bibitemsep} -% -%%% and give them default values -\bibleftmargin=2.5em -\bibindent=-\bibleftmargin -\bibparsep=0pt% -\bibitemsep\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax - -% -% To force another order (in Part 1, Part 2 cases) -% Actually, this is the same as \SortNoop used in the examples, -% so I do not discuss this in the documentation. It should -% not be considered part of apacite, but I keep it for backwards -% compatibility. -\newcommand{\bibphant}[1]{} - -% -% Replacement of the chapterbib `\@extra@b@citeb' command. This one -% accumulates all kinds of `extra' flags to accommodate multiple -% bibliographies of various packages (chapterbib, bibunits). -\def\APAC@extra@b@citeb{\APAC@curr@aux\APAC@bu\@extra@b@citeb}% -\def\APAC@extra@binfo{\APAC@curr@aux\APAC@bu\@extra@binfo}% - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% label-bibitem % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{% - \def\BBA{\BBAA}% - % For compatibility with chapterbib, bibunits, backref, and hyperref. - % Adapted from natbib.dtx. - \item[\hyper@natanchorstart{#2\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% - \@biblabel{#1}% - \hyper@natanchorend]% - \if@filesw{% - \def\BBA{\string\BBA}% - \let\protect\noexpand - % bibunits redefines \bibcite through \AtBeginDocument - % in a way that is incompatible with apacite's definition. - % The simplest way to get things working automatically - % seems to be introducing the parallel \APACbibcite command. - % This should also solve many other compatibility problems. - \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}% - \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\APACbibcite{#2}{#1}}% - \def\BBA{\BBAA}% - }% - \fi - \ignorespaces -} - -% Year is separately handled by \Y@<citation key> -\def\APACbibcite#1#2{% - \global\expandafter - \def\csname b@#1\APAC@extra@binfo\endcsname{#2}% names - \global\expandafter - \def\csname Y@#1\APAC@extra@binfo\endcsname{\@year@#2}% year -} -% We don't need this one anymore, but other packages may use it. -\let\bibcite\APACbibcite - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% COMPATIBILITY WITH BABEL %% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% -%% COMMENTS FROM hyperref.dtx: -%% -%% Package |babel| redefines \cmd{\bibcite} with -%% macro \cmd{\bbl@cite@choice}. It needs to be overwritten -%% to avoid the warning ``Label(s) may have changed.''. -%% -%% END COMMENTS -%% -%% Here, a slightly adapted version of the code mentioned above is inserted. -%% The other \bibcite-restoring compatibility code above does something -%% similar, but does not do the job correctly if babel is loaded (why?). -%% Clearly, this only works if babel is loaded before apacite, but -%% putting it in a \AtBeginDocument does not work well. - -\@ifundefined{bbl@cite@choice}{}{% - \g@addto@macro\bbl@cite@choice{% - \let\bibcite\APACbibcite - }% -} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% COMPATIBILITY WITH BIBTOPIC %% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{bibtopic}{% - % - % Somewhat rudely disable this command to prevent an undesired - % error message of bibtopic. - \renewcommand*\bt@change@thb{\relax}% - }{% - % - % These bibtopic hooks are included in the thebibliography - % environment, so bibtopic should work correctly. If bibtopic is - % not loaded, they should do nothing. - \providecommand{\bt@beg@thb@hook}{\relax} - \providecommand{\bt@end@thb@hook}{\relax} - }% -} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% COMPATIBILITY WITH BIBUNITS %% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -% Store the default apacite definitions. -\AtEndOfPackage{% - \let\APACstd@cite\cite - \let\APACstd@nocite\nocite - \let\APACstd@lbibitem\@lbibitem -} - -% Default definition. -\@ifundefined{APAC@bu}{\def\APAC@bu{}}{} - -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{bibunits}{% - % To mimic chapterbib behavior (with flags etc.). - \def\APAC@bu{% - \ifx\cite\std@cite - % Outside a bibunit; the `@APACbu' strings are intended to - % minimize the possibility of wrong matches, such as - % \b@ex11 = ex11 from the global aux - % or - % \b@ex11 = ex1 from bibunit 1, - % and the last `@' is similarly intended to avoid confusion - % if both bibunits and chapterbib are loaded (`11@1' = 11th - % bibunit, 1st chapterbib unit; `1@11' = 1st bibunit, 11th - % chapterbib unit). It seems unlikely that both packages would - % be used at the same time, but safety first. - @APACbu0@% - \else - % Within a bibunit: use bibunit number to distinguish the bibunits. - @APACbu\the\@bibunitauxcnt @% - \fi - }%% - % Standard apacite definition of \cite and \nocite commands. - \let\std@cite\APACstd@cite - % This is mainly necessary to avoid incorrect `Citation undefined' - % warnings. - \let\std@nocite\APACstd@nocite - % Restore apacite definition of \bibitem, mainly because of the - % \@newciteauxhandle instead of \@auxout. - \def\std@lbibitem[#1]#2{% - \let\@APACtemp@auxout\@newciteauxhandle - \let\@newciteauxhandle\@bibunitaux - \APACstd@lbibitem[#1]{#2}% - \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp@auxout - }%% - % To make sure everything works whether bibunits is loaded - % before or after apacite. - \let\@lbibitem\std@lbibitem - % - }{}% -} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% COMPATIBILITY WITH MULTIBBL %% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% Almost all of multibbl's code is redefined here, mainly because -% apacite needs to distinguish which citation refers to which -% bibliography, so that flags can be correctly set whether a citation -% is the first citation to the work in from the specific bibliography -% and correctly includes the meta-analysis flags with the various -% bibliographies. -% -% Default flag definition if multibbl is not loaded. -\@ifundefined{APAC@curr@aux}{\def\APAC@curr@aux{}}{} -% -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{multibbl}{% - % To mimic chapterbib behavior (with flags etc.). - \def\APAC@def@curr@aux#1{\def\APAC@curr@aux{@APACaux@#1@}}% - % Ditto. This puts the \bibcite commands in #1.aux instead - % of in the main aux file, so that the flags can be differentiated. - % This also means that the aux file has to be read by LaTeX - % before it is overwritten. - \def\newbibliography#1{% - \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}% - \@input@{#1.aux}% - \begingroup - \if@filesw - \expandafter\newwrite\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname - \expandafter\immediate\openout - \csname #1@auxfile\endcsname #1.aux\relax - \typeout{Writing auxiliary file #1.aux }% - \fi - \endgroup - }%% - % Add the flag to the bibliography. - \let\APAC@mbbl@bibliography\bibliography - \def\bibliography#1#2#3{% - \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}% - \let\@APACtemp@auxout\@newciteauxhandle - \def\@APACtemp{\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname}% - \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp - \APAC@mbbl@bibliography{#1}{#2}{#3}% - \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp@auxout - }%% - % Add an extra argument to \@@cite. - \let\@orig@@cite\@@cite - \def\@@cite<#1>[#2]#3#4{% - \nocite{#3}{#4}% - \let\@temp@nocite\nocite - \let\nocite\@gobble - % - \APAC@def@curr@aux{#3}% - \@orig@@cite<#1>[#2]{#4}% - % - \let\nocite\@temp@nocite - \let\@temp@nocite\@undefined - }%% - % - % Add an extra argument to \nocite. - \let\@orig@nocite\nocite - \def\nocite#1#2{% - % Define a flag. - \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}% - % - % No flag-setting in \nocite: a no-cite is not a cite, - % so a subsequent cite may be the first cite. - \@bsphack - \ifx\@onlypreamble\document - % Since we are after \begin{document} we can do the citations: - \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{% - \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% - % \@newciteauxhandle for compatibility with multibib - % #1@auxfile for compatibility with multibbl - \@ifundefined{#1@auxfile}{% - \if@filesw - \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\citation{\@citeb}}% - \fi - }{\if@filesw - \expandafter\immediate% - \write\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}% - \fi - }% - % - \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}{% - \edef\B@my@dummy{*}% - \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy - \else - \G@refundefinedtrue - \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}% - \fi - }{}% - }% - \else - % apacite has no compatibility problems, because it does not work - % with LaTeX 2.09 anyway, so we can do the following, suggested - % in ltbibl.dtx: - \AtBeginDocument{\nocite{#1}{#2}}% - \fi - \@esphack - % - % For compatibility with multibib. - \@restore@auxhandle - }%% - % - % Add an extra argument to \nocitemeta. - \let\@orig@@nocitemeta\nocitemeta - \def\nocitemeta#1#2{% - \nocite{#1}{#2}% - \let\@temp@nocite\nocite - \let\nocite\@gobble - % - \@orig@@nocitemeta{#2}% - % - \let\nocite\@temp@nocite - \let\@temp@nocite\@undefined - }% - }{}% -} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% COMPATIBILITY WITH MULTIBIB %% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% From instructions in multibib.dtx. -\providecommand\@newciteauxhandle{\@auxout} -\def\@restore@auxhandle{\gdef\@newciteauxhandle{\@auxout}} -% List of citation commands -\def\@mb@citenamelist{% - cite,fullcite,shortcite,citeNP,fullciteNP,shortciteNP,% - citeA,fullciteA,shortciteA,citeauthor,fullciteauthor,shortciteauthor,% - citeauthorNP,fullciteauthorNP,shortciteauthorNP,% - citeyear,citeyearNP,nocite,nocitemeta% -}% -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifundefined{newcites}{\global\let\@restore@auxhandle\relax}{}% -} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% COMPATIBILITY WITH SPLITBIB %% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{splitbib}{% - % Presumably, this doesn't hurt without splitbib as well. - \def\citeauthoryear{\string\citeauthoryear}% - }{}% -} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% COMPATIBILITY WITH NATBIB %% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{% - % - % Redefine a natbib command. This may be ethically dubious, but - % without it, natbib simply cannot handle apacite-generated .bbl - % files. The only reason I can think of why both apacite.sty - % and natbib would be loaded is exactly the situation when you - % want to use natbib for the citations and apacite for the reference - % list. In this situation you would load apacite.sty, not for the - % citation commands, but for the punctuation commands and labels - % defined by apacite. In this situation, the redefinition below - % is necessary and therefore I do this here. - % - \def\NAT@parse@date#1#2#3#4#5#6@@{% - \def\NAT@year{{#1}}\def\NAT@exlab{{#2}}% - }% - % - % natbib redefines \thebibliography, which interferes a little - % with our purposes. Therefore, add some patches. - % - \let\@oldbibpreamble\bibpreamble - \def\bibpreamble{% This goes wrong if \bibpreamble is redefined - % later on, i.e., by the user, but I haven't thought - % of a better hack yet. - \@oldbibpreamble% - \bibliographytypesize% - \bibliographyprenote% - \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% - {}% skip - {\csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% - }% - \let\@old@endthebibliography\endthebibliography - \def\endthebibliography{\@old@endthebibliography% - \normalsize}% - }{}% -} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% COMPATIBILITY WITH HYPERREF %% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% The code here is adapted from hyperref, natbib, and their respective -% documentation, to make use of their interoperability. - -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifundefined{NAT@parse}{% - \def\NAT@parse{This is a fake natbib command to fool hyperref.}}{}% - \@ifundefined{hyper@natlinkstart}{% - \let\hyper@natlinkstart\@gobble}{}% - \@ifundefined{hyper@natlinkend}{% - \let\hyper@natlinkend\relax}{}% - \@ifundefined{hyper@natanchorstart}{% - \let\hyper@natanchorstart\@gobble}{}% - \@ifundefined{hyper@natanchorend}{% - \let\hyper@natanchorend\relax}{}% - \@ifundefined{hyperpage}{% - \def\hyperpage#1{#1}}{}% -} +% \end{macrocode} % -% Remove spaces from hyperlinks (hyperref keeps them, even if they -% are removed from the visible output, so you'd get awkward results -% like \href{http://my .link}{http://my.link}. -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{% - % The next should always be true, but just to be sure... - \@ifpackageloaded{url}{% - % Is obeyspaces option requested? If not, then... - \ifx\@empty\Url@ObeySp\@empty - % remove spaces from hyperlinks. - \def\url@#1{\def\@tmp@arg{\string#1}% - \HyPsd@Subst{ }{}{\@tmp@arg}% - \hyper@linkurl{\Hurl{#1}}{\@tmp@arg}}% - \fi - }{}% - }{}} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% COMPATIBILITY WITH BACKREF %% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% -%% A bit of code that makes life a little easier -%% (adapted from amsrefs.dtx). -\def\back@cite{}% -\def\CurrentBib{}% -\def\PrintBackRefs{}% -\def\APACrestorebibitem{}% -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{backref}{% - % Make sure that \ifBR@verbose is defined. - \@ifundefined{ifBR@verbose}{% - \let\ifBR@verbose\iffalse - \let\fi\fi}{}% - % A backcite command that makes the code of other commands better - % readable. - \def\back@cite#1{% - \ifBR@verbose - \PackageInfo{backref}{back cite \string`#1\string'}% - \fi - \Hy@backout{#1\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% - }%% - % Adaptation of the \bibitem command so that backref does not - % scan the whole entry. The placement of the backrefs is explicitly - % done through \PrintBackRefs. - \def\APACrestorebibitem{% - \def\BR@@lbibitem[##1]##2{% - \BRorg@bibitem[{##1}]{##2}% - \def\CurrentBib{##2\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% - }%% - }% - % Printing the backrefs: revert to the standard backrefs macro. - \def\PrintBackRefs#1{\BR@backref{#1}}% - }{%%% - % backref not loaded. - \let\back@cite\@gobble - \let\PrintBackRefs\@gobble - }% -} - -\def\BR@@lbibitem[#1]#2#3\par{% - \BRorg@bibitem[#1]{#2}#3% - \BR@backref{#2}% -}% - +% \subsection{Citation commands} % -% Setting catcode of `#'; mainly useful in case the bibliography -% contains url's containing `#' symbols. Analogous to \makeatother and -% \makeatletter. -% Undocumented! [EM, 2007/08/30] -\def\makehashother{\catcode`\#=12\relax}% -\def\makehashmacropar{\catcode`\#=6\relax}% - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% FOR USE WITH THE URL PACKAGE (AND HYPERREF) %% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% These must be cleaned up, robustified, made optional, etc., and the most +% important \pkg{natbib} commands must be supported as well. This is for the +% todo-list. % -% APA requires breaking of url's AFTER a slash or BEFORE a dot. -% In particular, there should not be a break between "http:" and "//". -% url.sty also defines many other (punctuation) symbols at which a -% break may occur. APA does not mention this, but it seems in the spirit -% of the APA manual -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifpackageloaded{url}{% - % To circumvent an ``undefined'' error - \@ifundefined{Url@force@Tilde}{\def\Url@force@Tilde{\relax}}{}% - % - % The original dot. (Simply using `.' causes an infinite loop. - % This command is used below, so that encoding-issues can be resolved - % easier by redefining \Url@APACdot.) - \def\Url@APACdot{\mathchar"2E }% - \def\Url@APACcomma{\mathchar"2C }% - \def\Url@APACquestionmark{\mathchar"3F }% - \def\Url@APACexclamation{\mathchar"21 }% - \def\Url@APAChyphen{\mathchar"2D }% - \def\Url@APACunderscore{\_}% - % - % APA-definitions. - \def\APACurlBreaks{% - % Remove dot and slash from ordinary breaks. - \def\UrlBreaks{\do\@\do\\\do\|\do\;\do\>\do\]\do\)\do\'\do+\do\=\do\#}% - % Add slash to big breaks, so that http:// is broken after the second - % slash instead of after the colon. - \def\UrlBigBreaks{\do\/\do\:\do@url@hyp}% - % These are the default ones. Repeat them to get a complete style and - % we don't have to rely on what is the default (which might change). - \def\UrlNoBreaks{\do\(\do\[\do\{\do\<}% - \def\UrlOrds{\do\*\do\~\do\'\do\"}% - % Define a dot as an empty binary relation (after which a break may - % occur) followed by a dot-symbol (after which no break may occur). - % The Chicago Manual of Style requests the same treatment of - % a couple of other punctuation marks, different from url.sty's - % default behavior. - \def\UrlSpecials{% - \do\.{\mathbin{}\Url@APACdot }\do\,{\mathbin{}\Url@APACcomma }% - \do\-{\mathbin{}\Url@APAChyphen }% - \do\?{\mathbin{}\Url@APACquestionmark }% - \do\!{\mathbin{}\Url@APACexclamation }% - \do\_{\mathbin{}\Url@APACunderscore }% - \do\ {\Url@space}\do\%{\Url@percent}\do\^^M{\Url@space}% - \Url@force@Tilde}% package option may force faked text-ascii-tilde - }%% - % Change underscore for when a non-tt font is used. - \def\Url@OTnonTT{\do\<{\langle}\do\>{\mathbin{\rangle}}\do - \_{\mathbin{}\_}\do\|{\mid}\do\{{\lbrace}\do\}{\mathbin{\rbrace}}\do - \\{\mathbin{\backslash}}\UrlTildeSpecial} - - % Now define four APA url-styles, based on the standard styles in - % url.sty. - \def\url@APACttstyle{\def\UrlFont{\ttfamily}\APACurlBreaks }% - \def\url@APACrmstyle{\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}\APACurlBreaks }% - \def\url@APACsfstyle{\def\UrlFont{\sffamily}\APACurlBreaks }% - \def\url@APACsamestyle{\def\UrlFont{}\APACurlBreaks }% - % - % Use APACtt-style by default. - \urlstyle{APACtt}% - }{}% -} - -% In case \url is undefined, define a very simple version. -\AtBeginDocument{% - \@ifundefined{url}{% - \def\url#1{\texttt{#1}}% - }{}% -} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% THE CITATION COMMANDS %% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -% First citation in multi-citation. +% \begin{macro}{\if@F@cite} +% First citation in a multi-citation. +% \begin{macrocode} \newif\if@F@cite\@F@citetrue - -% Two flags to denote whether only author or year must be cited or both. +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\if@A@cite} +% \begin{macro}{\if@Y@cite} +% Two flags to denote whether only the author or only the year must be cited +% or both. +% \begin{macrocode} \newif\if@A@cite\@A@citefalse \newif\if@Y@cite\@Y@citefalse - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \cite<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \fullcite<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \shortcite<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% writes \citation{keys} on .aux -% produces (prefix Authors1, Year1; Authors2, Year2; ..., postfix) +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - +% \begin{macro}{\cite} +% \begin{macro}{\fullcite} +% \begin{macro}{\shortcite} +% Parenthetical citation commands. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\cite{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% @@ -6599,7 +5592,6 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@cite}% {\@cite<>}% } - \def\fullcite{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% @@ -6609,7 +5601,6 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@cite}% {\@cite<>}% } - \def\shortcite{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% @@ -6619,17 +5610,16 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@cite}% {\@cite<>}% } - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \citeNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \fullciteNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \shortciteNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% writes \citation{keys} on .aux -% produces prefix Authors1, Year1; Authors2, Year2; ..., postfix -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\citeNP} +% \begin{macro}{\fullciteNP} +% \begin{macro}{\shortciteNP} +% Parenthetical citation commands, but without the actual parentheses. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\citeNP{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% @@ -6639,7 +5629,6 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@cite}% {\@cite<>}% } - \def\fullciteNP{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% @@ -6649,7 +5638,6 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@cite}% {\@cite<>}% } - \def\shortciteNP{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% @@ -6659,17 +5647,15 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@cite}% {\@cite<>}% } - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% second layer of \cite command +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - +% \begin{macro}{\@cite} +% Second layer of the parenthetical and NP citation commands. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\@cite<#1>{% - % - % definition of some parameters - % \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation \def\@BBA{\BBAA}% % `and' between authors \def\@BBAY{\BBAY}% % between author and year @@ -6684,17 +5670,14 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@@cite<#1>}% {\@@cite<#1>[]}% } - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \citeA<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \fullciteA<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \shortciteA<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% writes \citation{keys} on .aux -% produces prefix Authors1 (Year1), ..., AuthorN (YearN, postfix) +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - +% \begin{macro}{\citeA} +% \begin{macro}{\fullciteA} +% \begin{macro}{\shortciteA} +% In-text citation commands. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\citeA{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% @@ -6702,7 +5685,6 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@citeA}% {\@citeA<>}% } - \def\fullciteA{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% @@ -6710,7 +5692,6 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@citeA}% {\@citeA<>}% } - \def\shortciteA{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% @@ -6718,17 +5699,15 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@citeA}% {\@citeA<>}% } - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% second layer of \citeA command +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - +% \begin{macro}{\@citeA} +% Second layer of in-text citation commands. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\@citeA<#1>{% - % - % definition of some parameters - % \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis. \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation \def\@BBA{\BBAB}% % `and' between authors @@ -6745,23 +5724,23 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@@cite<#1>}% {\@@cite<#1>[]}% } - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \citeauthor<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \fullciteauthor<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \shortciteauthor<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% writes \citation{keys} on .aux -% produces prefix Authors1, ..., AuthorsN, postfix -% -% \citeauthorNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \fullciteauthorNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% \shortciteauthorNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% does the same, but for a parenthetical citation -% (the difference being `\&' instead of `and' between authors) -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\citeauthor} +% \begin{macro}{\fullciteauthor} +% \begin{macro}{\shortciteauthor} +% \begin{macro}{\citeauthorNP} +% \begin{macro}{\fullciteauthorNP} +% \begin{macro}{\shortciteauthorNP} +% Commands that only cite the author, for parenthetical and in-text citations, +% the difference being that `\&' is used in the parenthetical versions, +% whereas the in-text versions use `and' between the authors. Note that all +% are without parentheses; \cmd{\citeauthorA} would be a better name for +% \cmd{\citeauthor} to clarify its role (cf.~\cmd{\citeA}, \cmd{\cite}, and +% \cmd{\citeNP}), but for backwards compatibility and compatibility with +% some other citation packages, it is \cmd{\citeauthor}. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\citeauthor{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% @@ -6769,7 +5748,6 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@citeauthor}% {\@citeauthor<>}% } - \def\fullciteauthor{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% @@ -6777,7 +5755,6 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@citeauthor}% {\@citeauthor<>}% } - \def\shortciteauthor{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% @@ -6785,7 +5762,6 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@citeauthor}% {\@citeauthor<>}% } - \def\citeauthorNP{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% @@ -6793,7 +5769,6 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@citeauthorNP}% {\@citeauthorNP<>}% } - \def\fullciteauthorA{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##1}}% @@ -6801,7 +5776,6 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@citeauthorNP}% {\@citeauthorNP<>}% } - \def\shortciteauthorA{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##2}{##2}}% @@ -6809,17 +5783,19 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@citeauthorNP}% {\@citeauthorNP<>}% } - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% second layer of \citeauthor and \citeauthorNP commands -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@citeauthor} +% \begin{macro}{\@citeauthorNP} +% Second layer of the author citation commands. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\@citeauthor<#1>{% - % - % definition of some parameters - % \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation \def\@BBA{\BBAB}% % `and' between authors @@ -6836,11 +5812,7 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@@cite<#1>}% {\@@cite<#1>[]}% } - \def\@citeauthorNP<#1>{% - % - % definition of some parameters - % \def\@BBOP{}% % open parenthesis \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation \def\@BBA{\BBAA}% % `and' between authors @@ -6857,19 +5829,14 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@@cite<#1>}% {\@@cite<#1>[]}% } - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \citeyear<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% writes \citation{keys} on .aux -% produces (prefix Year1, ..., YearN, postfix) -% -% \citeyearNP<prefix>[postfix]{keys} -% writes \citation{keys} on .aux -% produces prefix Year1, ..., YearN, postfix +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - +% \begin{macro}{\citeyear} +% \begin{macro}{\citeyearNP} +% Cite only the year; parenthetical and without parentheses. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\citeyear{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% @@ -6879,7 +5846,6 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@citeyear}% {\@citeyear<>}% } - \def\citeyearNP{% \def\BCAY##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% kept for compat. with prev. versions \def\citeauthoryear##1##2##3{\BCA{##1}{##2}}% @@ -6889,17 +5855,14 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@citeyear}% {\@citeyear<>}% } - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% second layer of \citeyear command +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - +% \begin{macro}{\@citeyear} +% Second layer of the year citation commands. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\@citeyear<#1>{% - % - % definition of some parameters - % \def\@BAP{\BAP}% % after precitation [=#1] before first citation \def\@BBA{}% % `and' between authors \def\@BBAY{}% % between author and year @@ -6914,25 +5877,27 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@@cite<#1>}% {\@@cite<#1>[]}% } - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% -%% The core citation routines -%% The following commands must have been defined: -%% \@BBOP open parenthesis -%% \@BAP after precitation [=#1] before first citation -%% \@BBA `and' between authors -%% \@BBAY between author and year -%% \@BAY after year -%% \@BBY between years of multiple citations with same author -%% \@BBC between cites -%% \@BBN after last citation before note/postcitation [=#2] -%% \@BBCP close parenthesis -%% \@BAstyle formatting style of authors (e. g., \scshape) -%% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -%%% Code to be executed if current author(s) equal previous +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% We are now arriving at the core citation routines. The following commands +% must have been defined:\\ +% \begin{tabular}{@{\qquad}ll@{}} +% \cmd{\@BBOP} & open parenthesis \\ +% \cmd{\@BAP} & after precitation before first citation \\ +% \cmd{\@BBA} & `and' between authors \\ +% \cmd{\@BBAY} & between author and year \\ +% \cmd{\@BAY} & after year \\ +% \cmd{\@BBY} & between years of multiple citations with same author \\ +% \cmd{\@BBC} & between cites \\ +% \cmd{\@BBN} & after last citation before note/postcitation \\ +% \cmd{\@BBCP} & close parenthesis \\ +% \cmd{\@BAstyle} & formatting style of authors (e.g., \cmd{\scshape}) +% \end{tabular} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ifauthorsequalc@de} +% Code to be executed if current author(s) equal(s) previous. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\@ifauthorsequalc@de#1{% \if@F@cite% \@F@citefalse% @@ -6947,8 +5912,12 @@ short form, of the examples. \hyper@natlinkend \fi% } - -%%% Code to be executed if current author(s) do not equal previous +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@ifauthorsunequalc@de} +% Code to be executed if current author(s) do(es) not equal previous. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\@ifauthorsunequalc@de#1{% \if@F@cite% \@F@citefalse% @@ -6975,51 +5944,62 @@ short form, of the examples. \fi% \let\BBA\relax% } - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@@cite} +% The core citation command. Standard \LaTeX{} and other packages use +% \cmd{\@citex} for this. It may be useful to change this as well, to increase +% the likelihood of compatibility with some packages. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\@@cite<#1>[#2]#3{% - % - % Write citation(s) to .aux file(s) - % +% \end{macrocode} +% Write citation(s) to .aux file(s) +% \begin{macrocode} \nocite{#3}% - % - % the previous cite, for multiple citations with same author - % +% \end{macrocode} +% The previous cite, for multiple citations with same author. +% \begin{macrocode} \edef\@citeP{}% - % - % open parenthesis and pre-note - % The \mbox is to avoid hyperref problems if a \citeA follows an \item. +% \end{macrocode} +% Open parenthesis and pre-note. The \cmd{\mbox} is to avoid \pkg{hyperref} +% problems if a \cmd{\citeA} follows an \cmd{\item}. +% \begin{macrocode} \mbox{\@BBOP}% \ifx\@empty#1\@empty \else% {\ignorespaces #1\@BAP}% \fi% - % - % loop over citation entries - % +% \end{macrocode} +% Loop over citation entries +% \begin{macrocode} \@for\@citeb:=#3\do{% - % Removes a possible space before the citation key, so that - % e.g. \cite{key1, key2} can be done. +% \end{macrocode} +% Removes a possible space before the citation key, so that, e.g., +% \verb*+\cite{key1, key2}+ can be done. +% \begin{macrocode} \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% - % For backref. +% \end{macrocode} +% For backref. +% \begin{macrocode} \back@cite{\@citeb}% - % - % check whether citation is defined - % +% \end{macrocode} +% Check whether the citation is defined. +% \begin{macrocode} \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% {\expandafter\def\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}% \expandafter\def\csname Y@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{?}% - % The following is now handled by \nocite - %\G@refundefinedtrue - %\@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}% + %% The following is now handled by \nocite + %% \G@refundefinedtrue + %% \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}% }%% - % If citation is defined: - % check whether flag is set that identifies that - % this is not the first citation to the work - % if flag is not set, it will be set to DUMMY - % if this is the first citation to the work, - % the full citation is used; else the short version - % is used - % +% \end{macrocode} +% If the citation is defined, check whether the flag has been set that +% identifies that this is not the first citation to the work. If this +% flag has not been set, it will be set to |DUMMY|. If this is the first +% citation to the work, the full citation is used; else the short version +% is used. +% \begin{macrocode} {\@ifundefined{flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% {\global\expandafter \def\csname flag@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}% @@ -7028,30 +6008,33 @@ short form, of the examples. {\def\BCA##1##2{{\@BAstyle ##2}}% }% }% - % Check whether current author(s) is (are) equivalent - % to previous. If so, only year is cited in text - % and a \@BBY (probably comma and space) is inserted between - % the two years. - % - % The \protected@edef fixes the problem with authors with accents - % (e.g., J{\"{o}}reskog). Previous versions of apacite solved this - % less elegantly (accentfix option). This fix provided by Robert Schlicht. - % See also the new definition of \@citeP below. - \protected@edef\B@my@dummy{\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% - \ifx\@citeP\B@my@dummy% +% \end{macrocode} +% Check whether the current author(s) is (are) equivalent to the +% previous. If so, only the year is cited in the text and a \cmd{\@BBY} +% (probably comma and space) is inserted between the two years. The +% \cmd{\protected@edef} fixes the problem with authors with accents +% (e.g., J{\"{o}}reskog). Older versions of \pkg{apacite} solved this +% less elegantly (\pkgoption{accentfix} option). This fix was provided by +% Robert Schlicht. See also the new definition of \cmd{\@citeP} below. +% \begin{macrocode} + \protected@edef\B@my@dummy{\csname + b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + \ifx\@citeP\B@my@dummy \@ifauthorsequalc@de{\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% - \else% + \else \@ifauthorsunequalc@de{\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% - \fi% - % define previous citation-author as current - % + \fi +% \end{macrocode} +% Store the current author(s) for comparison in the next citation (if +% any). +% \begin{macrocode} \protected@edef\@citeP{\csname b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% - % - \let\BCA\relax% + \let\BCA\relax }%% - % end loop over citation entries - % add note [=#2] and closing parenthesis - % +% \end{macrocode} +% End of the loop over citation entries. Add the post-note and closing +% parenthesis. +% \begin{macrocode} \ifx\@empty#2\@empty \else% {\@BBN #2}% @@ -7060,36 +6043,41 @@ short form, of the examples. {\@BAY}% \fi% {\@BBCP}% - % - % define first citation true for next \@@cite - % +% \end{macrocode} +% We're finished with this citation command. Initialize for the next +% \cmd{\@@cite} call. +% \begin{macrocode} \@F@citetrue % } - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \nocite{key} : entry in reference list, not in text -% -% This is a little different from \@@cite with -% \@A@citefalse and \@Y@citefalse -% because of the `*' variant (cite all entries in bibfile) +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - +% \begin{macro}{\nocite} +% This induces an entry in the reference list, but not in the text. It is +% also called by the other citation commands to handle some bookkeeping. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\nocite#1{% - % No flag-setting in \nocite: a no-cite is not a cite, - % so a subsequent cite may be the first cite. +% \end{macrocode} +% No flag-setting in \cmd{\nocite}: a no-cite is not a citation, so a +% subsequent citation may be the first one. +% \begin{macrocode} \@bsphack \ifx\@onlypreamble\document - % Since we are after \begin{document} we can do the citations: +% \end{macrocode} +% We are after |\begin{document}|, so we can do the citations. +% \begin{macrocode} \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% - % \@newciteauxhandle for compatibility with multibib +% \end{macrocode} +% The \cmd{\@newciteauxhandle} is for compatibility with \pkg{multibib}. +% \begin{macrocode} \if@filesw \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\citation{\@citeb}}% \fi - % \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Check for |\nocite{*}|. +% \begin{macrocode} \edef\B@my@dummy{*}% \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy \else @@ -7099,34 +6087,38 @@ short form, of the examples. }{}% }% \else - % apacite has no compatibility problems, because it does not work - % with LaTeX 2.09 anyway, so we can do the following, suggested - % in ltbibl.dtx: +% \end{macrocode} +% \pkg{apacite} has no compatibility problems with \LaTeX~2.09, because it +% does not work with \LaTeX~2.09 anyway, so we can do the following, +% suggested in \fname{ltbibl.dtx}: +% \begin{macrocode} \AtBeginDocument{\nocite{#1}}% \fi \@esphack - % - % For compatibility with multibib. +% \end{macrocode} +% For compatibility with \pkg{multibib}. +% \begin{macrocode} \@restore@auxhandle } - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% \nocitemeta{key} : entry in reference list, not in text, -% for entries that are used in a meta-analysis. +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - +% \begin{macro}{\nocitemeta} +% This induces an entry in the reference list, but not in the text, and +% compared to \cmd{\nocite} defines an additional flag that indicates that the +% reference has been used in the meta-analysis reported. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\nocitemeta#1{% \nocite{#1}% \@bsphack% \expandafter\global\expandafter\def \csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{% \APACmetaprenote}% - % \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% - % Define meta-analysis flag for current item +% \end{macrocode} +% Define the meta-analysis flag for the current item. +% \begin{macrocode} \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% {\global\expandafter \def\csname flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname{DUMMY}% @@ -7135,30 +6127,85 @@ short form, of the examples. }% \@esphack% } - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -% \APACinsertmetastar{key}: insert an asterisk before the names in the -% reference list for entries that are used in a meta-analysis. +% \subsection{Bibliography structure} % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\def\APACinsertmetastar#1{% - \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% - \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% - \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% - {}% skip - {{\APACmetastar}}% - }% -} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% +% Here we define commands and environments that handle the structure of the +% reference list, various global style parameters, and the communication with +% the citation commands. Commands for detailed aspects of the entries +% themselves are defined below. % -% No labels in the bibliography. +% \begin{macro}{\bibnewpage} +% Macro for starting a new page before the bibliography, if requested. +% \fname{apa.cls} uses \cmd{\newpage} instead. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\bibnewpage{\clearpage}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % +% \begin{macro}{\@biblabel} +% No labels in the bibliography. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\@biblabel#1{} - +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@lbibitem} +% Label-bibitem +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{% + \def\BBA{\BBAA}% ``\&'' +% \end{macrocode} +% For compatibility with \pkg{chapterbib}, \pkg{bibunits}, \pkg{backref}, and +% \pkg{hyperref}. Adapted from \fname{natbib.dtx}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \item[\hyper@natanchorstart{#2\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + \@biblabel{#1}% + \hyper@natanchorend]% + \if@filesw{% + \def\BBA{\string\BBA}% + \let\protect\noexpand +% \end{macrocode} +% \pkg{bibunits} redefines \cmd{\bibcite} through \cmd{\AtBeginDocument} +% in a way that is incompatible with \pkg{apacite}'s definition. The +% simplest way to get things working automatically seems to be +% introducing the parallel \cmd{\APACbibcite} command. This should also +% solve many other compatibility problems. +% \begin{macrocode} + \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\bibcite{#2}{#1}}% + \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\APACbibcite{#2}{#1}}% + \def\BBA{\BBAA}% + }% + \fi + \ignorespaces +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APACbibcite} +% \begin{macro}{\bibcite} +% These commands pass the author-year information from the reference list to +% the citation commands. See above for the necessity for \cmd{\APACbibcite}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\APACbibcite#1#2{% + \global\expandafter + \def\csname b@#1\APAC@extra@binfo\endcsname{#2}% names + \global\expandafter + \def\csname Y@#1\APAC@extra@binfo\endcsname{\@year@#2}% year +} +% \end{macrocode} +% We don't need this one anymore, but other packages may use it. +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\bibcite\APACbibcite +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} % +% \begin{macro}{\st@rtbibsection} +% Start a new section for the reference list. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\st@rtbibsection{% \@bibnewpage% start a new page if desired \if@numberedbib% @@ -7168,16 +6215,28 @@ short form, of the examples. \if@tocbib% \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\refname}% \fi% +% \end{macrocode} +% Ideally, we'd use something like |\sectionmark{{\refname}}|, so that +% user-defined page heading styles are respected. But this does not work +% properly, because it generates section numbers. Therefore, we define the +% complete headings here. I need to find a better solution for this. +% \begin{macrocode} \@ifundefined{chapter} - {\@mkboth{{\refname}}{{\refname}}}% do we need this? yep. why? - {\markright{{\refname}}}% do we need this? yep. why? - % + {\@mkboth{{\refname}}{{\refname}}}% + {\markright{{\refname}}}% \fi% }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % +% \begin{macro}{\st@rtbibchapter} +% Start a new chapter for the reference list. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\st@rtbibchapter{% - % here no \@bibnewpage, because it is assumed that - % the \chapter starts a new page +% \end{macrocode} +% Here no \cmd{\@bibnewpage}, because it is assumed that the \cmd{\chapter} +% starts a new page. +% \begin{macrocode} \if@numberedbib% \chapter{\bibname}% e.g., 6. References \else% @@ -7185,455 +6244,2269 @@ short form, of the examples. \if@tocbib% \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\bibname}% \fi% - \@mkboth{{\bibname}}{{\bibname}}% do we need this? yep. why? - % +% \end{macrocode} +% Again, \cmd{\chaptermark} and \cmd{\sectionmark} don't work properly, so +% define headings at a lower level. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@mkboth{{\bibname}}{{\bibname}}% \fi% }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -% +% \begin{environment}{thebibliography} +% This environment contains the reference list. For historical reasons, it is +% defined in the plain \TeX{} way through definition of the +% \cmd{\thebibliography} and \cmd{\endthebibliography} macros instead of +% \cmd{\renewenvironment}. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\thebibliography#1{% - % - % Start the bibliography section or chapter - % +% \end{macrocode} +% If \cmd{\chapter} is not defined, start a bibliography section. +% \begin{macrocode} \@ifundefined{chapter}% {\st@rtbibsection}% -% else: chapter is defined - {\@ifundefined{@sectionbibtrue}% we have to guess - {\@ifundefined{@mainmatterfalse}% check if mainmatter exists +% \end{macrocode} +% Else, chapter is defined. Check first whether an explicit option has been +% chosen. +% \begin{macrocode} + {\@ifundefined{@sectionbibtrue}% +% \end{macrocode} +% No explicit option chosen, so we have to speculate. If \cmd{\mainmatter} +% is not defined (typically a report), assume that the bibliography is +% a chapter. If \cmd{\mainmatter} is defined, a bibliography in the +% main matter is typically a chapter-specific one, so generate a +% bibliography section. A bibliography in the back matter is most likely +% a global one, so then generate a bibliography chapter. +% \begin{macrocode} + {\@ifundefined{@mainmatterfalse}% {\st@rtbibchapter}% -% else: mainmatter is defined - {\if@mainmatter% - \st@rtbibsection% typically, a chapter-specific bibliogr. - \else% - \st@rtbibchapter% a bibliography at the end - \fi% + {\if@mainmatter + \st@rtbibsection + \else + \st@rtbibchapter + \fi }% }% - {% an explicit option has been chosen - % - \if@sectionbib% - \st@rtbibsection% bibliography is a section - \else% - \st@rtbibchapter% bibliography is a chapter - \fi% +% \end{macrocode} +% If an explicit option has been chosen, simply use this. +% \begin{macrocode} + {\if@sectionbib + \st@rtbibsection + \else + \st@rtbibchapter + \fi }% }% - % +% \end{macrocode} +% Insert some code between the chapter or section heading and the reference +% list. \cmd{\bibliographytypesize} will typically be used for some font +% settings and \cmd{\bibliographyprenote} for explanatory text, but this is +% up to the user. The ``metaprenote'' is a fixed text indicating that +% marked references are included in the meta-analysis reported. +% \begin{macrocode} \bibliographytypesize% e.g., to put the bibliography in \small type \bibliographyprenote% some explanatory note before the references - % \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% {}% skip {\csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% - % +% \end{macrocode} +% Initialize the list environment that holds the reference list. +% \begin{macrocode} \list{\relax}{\labelsep=0em% % \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax \parsep=\bibparsep% \itemsep=\bibitemsep% \leftmargin=\bibleftmargin% \itemindent=\bibindent}% changed to cope with 4th ed. +% \end{macrocode} +% \cmd{\newblock} is inserted between ``blocks'' of a reference entry and +% inserts some stretchable and shrinkable extra space between the blocks. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\newblock{\hskip .11em plus .33em minus .07em}% \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty4000 - \sfcode`\.=1000\relax - % For compatibility with bibtopic. + \sfcode`\.=1000\relax %' +% \end{macrocode} +% For compatibility with \pkg{bibtopic}. +% \begin{macrocode} \bt@beg@thb@hook - % To overrule backref. +% \end{macrocode} +% To overrule \pkg{backref}. +% \begin{macrocode} \APACrestorebibitem } \def\endthebibliography{% - % For compatibility with bibtopic. +% \end{macrocode} +% For compatibility with \pkg{bibtopic}. +% \begin{macrocode} \bt@end@thb@hook - % +% \end{macrocode} +% Warning if no item was included in the list and return to normal font size. +% If \cmd{\bibliographytypesize} includes other formatting as well, the user +% has to reset this explicitly after the bibliography, at least if there is +% text after it. +% \begin{macrocode} \def\@noitemerr{% \@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}% }% \endlist\normalsize } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% +% \subsection{Reference list formatting} +% +% Traditionally, the reference list formatting is almost completely done by +% the bibliography style (\fname{.bst} file). Modeled after its predecessor, +% \pkg{theapa}, \pkg{apacite} has always supported some possibilities for +% customization through redefinable macros in the reference list. Due to my +% own customization needs, requests by users, and the language support, an +% increasing amount of reference list formatting is handled in this way. This +% section defines the default implementation of these macros, which users +% thus can redefine. +% +% \begin{macro}{\@connect@with@commas} +% An auxiliary function: Make a comma-separated output list of the input, +% recognizing empty arguments. Must be called with one argument, and the +% argument contains a comma-separated list of elements. The elements of this +% should generally be enclosed in braces. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@connect@with@commas#1{% + \def\@comma@space{\unskip, }% + \let\@connect@string\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% Loop over elements. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@for\@element@:=#1\do{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Commas should only be inserted if both sides are nonempty. +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx\@empty\@element@% + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% Not empty: insert connect string (nothing for the first nonempty +% element, a comma and space afterwards). +% \begin{macrocode} + \@connect@string\@element@% + \let\@connect@string\@comma@space + \fi + }% + \let\@connect@string\@undefined + \let\@comma@space\@undefined +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%% REFERENCE LIST FORMATTING COMMANDS %% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% -% Dates -% +% \begin{macro}{\APACmetastar} +% \begin{macro}{\APACinsertmetastar} +% Insert an asterisk before the names in the reference list for entries that +% are used in a meta-analysis. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\APACmetastar}{\ensuremath{{}^\ast}} +\def\APACinsertmetastar#1{% + \@for\@citeb:=#1\do{% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% + \@ifundefined{flagmeta@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {}% skip + {{\APACmetastar}}% + }% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APACrefYear} +% Formatting of the year in the reference list. Note that instead of redefining +% this command, one can also redefine the parentheses themselves. The argument +% should never be empty. The companion macro \cmd{\APACrefYearMonthDay} is +% defined below in the language-specific section. +% \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\APACrefYear}[1]{% - % Should never be empty. {\BBOP}{#1}{\BBCP}% } -\newcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or January\or February\or March\or - April\or May\or June\or July\or August\or September\or October\or - November\or December\or Winter\or Spring\or Summer\or Fall\else - {#1}\fi} -% This command should be replaced by a language-dependent one. -\newcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{% - % year (+ addendum) - {\BBOP}{#1}% - % month - \ifx\@empty#2\@empty - \else - \unskip, {#2}% - \fi - % day - \ifx\@empty#3\@empty - \else - \unskip\ {#3}% - \fi - {\BBCP}% -} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -% Titles -% Arguments: #1 = capitalized title, #2 = not capitalized title +% Title formatting. In these, |#1| is the capitalized title and |#2| is the +% sentence-case title. % -% Article title (roman, not capitalized) +% \begin{macro}{\APACrefatitle} +% Article title (roman, not capitalized). +% \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\APACrefatitle}[2]{#2} -% Book title (italic, not capitalized) +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\APACrefbtitle} +% Book title (italic, not capitalized). +% \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\APACrefbtitle}[2]{\Bem{#2}} -% English translation of foreign article title (bracketed, roman, not capitalized) +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\APACrefaetitle} +% English translation of a foreign article title (bracketed, roman, not +% capitalized). +% \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\APACrefaetitle}[2]{[#2]} -% English translation of foreign book title (bracketed, roman, not capitalized) +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macro}{\APACrefbetitle} +% English translation of a foreign book title (bracketed, roman, not +% capitalized). +% \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\APACrefbetitle}[2]{[#2]} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% I copied the following couple of functions literally from -% amsrefs.dtx (\PrintEdition ff.) and made only one slight -% adaptation: removing \editiontext. -% Perhaps I can make this more language-neutral, but I think -% separate functions are needed for different languages. -\let\@xp\expandafter -% \PrintCardinal{2} gives `2nd' etc. -% If the argument is not an integer number, it is copied literally -% to the output. (At least, apparently, because I do not really -% understand how it works.) -\newcommand{\PrintCardinal}[1]{% - \afterassignment\print@cardinal - \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil -} -\def\print@cardinal#1#2\@nil{% - \ifx\relax#1\relax - \ifnum\count@>\z@ - \CardinalNumeric\count@ - \else - ??th% - \fi - \else - \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi - #1#2\relax - \fi -} -\newcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{% - \number#1\relax - \if - \ifnum#1<14 - \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi - \else - F% - \fi - T% - th% - \else - \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax - \ifcase#1th\or st\or nd\or rd\else th\fi - \fi -} -\def\keep@last@digit#1#2{% - \ifx\relax#2% - \@xp\@gobbletwo - \else - #1=#2\relax - \fi - \keep@last@digit#1% -} -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% +% \begin{macro}{\APACjournalVolNumPages} % Journal, volume, number, pages -% (#1 = journal, #2 = volume, #3 = number, #4 = formatted pages) +% (|#1| = journal, |#2| = volume, |#3| = number, |#4| = formatted pages). +% \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\APACjournalVolNumPages}[4]{% - % journal - \Bem{#1}% - % volume + \Bem{#1}% journal \ifx\@empty#2\@empty \else - \unskip, \Bem{#2}% + \unskip, \Bem{#2}% volume \fi - % issue number \ifx\@empty#3\@empty \else - \unskip({#3})% + \unskip({#3})% issue number \fi - % pages \ifx\@empty#4\@empty \else - \unskip, {#4}% + \unskip, {#4}% pages \fi } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -% Addres and publisher/institution -% (#1 = address, #2 = publisher) +% \begin{macro}{\APACaddressPublisher} +% \begin{macro}{\APACaddressInstitution} +% Address and publisher/institution (|#1| = address, |#2| = publisher). +% \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\APACaddressPublisher}[2]{% \ifx\@empty#1\@empty - % publisher \ifx\@empty#2\@empty \else - {#2}% + {#2}% publisher \fi - % \else - % address - {#1}% - % publisher + {#1}% address \ifx\@empty#2\@empty \else - \unskip: {#2}% + \unskip: {#2}% publisher \fi - % \fi } -% \let\APACaddressInstitution\APACaddressPublisher +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} % -% Addres and publisher/institution if the latter is also the author. -% (#1 = address, #2 = publisher) +% \begin{macro}{\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth} +% \begin{macro}{\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth} +% Address and publisher/institution if the latter is also the author. +% (|#1| = address, |#2| = publisher). +% \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth}[2]{% \ifx\@empty#1\@empty - % Publisher. This cannot be empty, because it is equal to the author. - {\BAuthor{}}% - % + {\BAuthor{}}% Publisher formatted as ``Author'' \else - % Address and publisher. These are not empty. - {#1\unskip: \BAuthor{}}% - % + {#1\unskip: \BAuthor{}}% Address: Author \fi } -% \let\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth -% -% Howpublished. -% \APAChowpublished is only inserted in the .bbl file if the -% argument is nonempty. Because we don't want any special formatting, -% and \def\APAChowpublished#1{#1} leads to problems with hash marks -% in url's that may be present in howpublished, we simply pretend -% that \APAChowpublished does not have an argument and does nothing. -%\def\APAChowpublished{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APAChowpublished} +% Formatting of the \fieldname{howpublished} field. The +% \cmd{\APAChowpublished} macro is only inserted in the \fname{.bbl} file if +% the argument is nonempty. Because we don't want any special formatting, and +% |\def\APAChowpublished#1{#1}| leads to problems with hash marks (`|#|') in +% url's that may be present in \fieldname{howpublished}, we simply pretend +% that \cmd{\APAChowpublished} does not have an argument and does nothing. +% \begin{macrocode} \let\APAChowpublished\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -% URL formatting +% \begin{environment}{APACrefURL} +% URL formatting. Use an environment instead of a macro to avoid some problems +% with url's as arguments of macros. The optional argument is the date that +% the url was last checked. +% \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{APACrefURL}[1][]{% \ifx\@empty#1\@empty - \BAvailFrom + \BAvailFrom % Available from \else - \BRetrieved{#1}% + \BRetrieved{#1}% Retrieved <date>, from \fi }{} -% URLs of messages +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} +% +% \begin{environment}{APACrefURLmsg} +% URLs of messages. +% \begin{macrocode} \newenvironment{APACrefURLmsg}{% \BMsgPostedTo }{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} % +% \begin{macro}{\APACorigED} +% \begin{macro}{\APACorigEDS} % Original editor(s) for reprints and translations. +% \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\APACorigED}[1]{% \ifx\@empty#1\@empty \else - % ``by E. D. Itor (Ed.)'' - \Bby\ {#1}, \BED{}% + \Bby\ {#1}, \BED{}% ``by E. D. Itor (Ed.)'' \fi } -% \newcommand{\APACorigEDS}[1]{% \ifx\@empty#1\@empty \else - % ``by E. D. Itor \& A. N. Other (Eds.)'' - \Bby\ {#1}, \BEDS{}% + \Bby\ {#1}, \BEDS{}% ``by E. D. Itor \& A. N. Other (Eds.)'' + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APACbVolEdTR} +% Volume, edition, type, number, for a technical report (|#1| = formatted +% edition + volume, |#2| = formatted technical report type + number). +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\APACbVolEdTR}[2]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + {(#2)}% (Technical Report No.\ <no>) + \fi + \else + ({#1}% (2nd ed., Vol.~1 + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip; {#2}% ; Technical Report No.\ <no> + \fi + )% Final parenthesis. + \fi +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APACbVolEdTRpgs} +% Volume, edition, type, number, pages for an \entryname{@intechreport}. +% Arguments: |#1| = formatted edition + volume, |#2| = formatted technical +% report type + number, |#3| = formatted pages. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\APACbVolEdTRpgs}[3]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + {(#3)}%% (pp. 10--30) + \fi + \else + %% (Technical Report No.\ <no>, pp. 10--30) + (\@connect@with@commas{{#2},{#3}})% + \fi + \else + ({#1}% (2nd ed., Vol.~1 + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + \unskip; {#3}% ; pp. 10--30 + \fi + \else + %% ; Technical Report No.\ <no>, pp. 10--30 + \unskip; \@connect@with@commas{{#2},{#3}}% + \fi + )% Final parenthesis. \fi } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % % Various note formatting functions. % -% Only note +% \begin{macro}{\APACrefnote} +% Only a note. +% \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\APACrefnote}[1]{% \ifx\@empty#1\@empty \else ({#1})% \fi } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -% Original year + optional note. -% Arguments: #1 = year, #2 = note. +% \begin{macro}{\APACorigyearnote} +% Original year + optional note (|#1| = year, |#2| = note). +% \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\APACorigyearnote}[2]{% \ifx\@empty#1\@empty - % Original year empty: format note. +% \end{macrocode} +% Original year empty: format note. +% \begin{macrocode} \APACrefnote{#2}% \else - % Check for \bibnodate. I think the following command does not check - % whether #1 = `\bibnodate', but expands them, but that should - % also be OK and saves a lot of juggling with \expandafter commands. +% \end{macrocode} +% Check for \cmd{\bibnodate}. I think the following command does not check +% whether |#1| = `\cmd{\bibnodate}', but expands them; but that should also +% be OK and saves a lot of juggling with \cmd{\expandafter} commands. +% \begin{macrocode} \ifx\bibnodate#1\@empty - % Original year unknown: format (only) note. +% \end{macrocode} +% Original year unknown: Format (only) note. +% \begin{macrocode} \APACrefnote{#2}% \else - % Original year has been given: ``Original work published''. +% \end{macrocode} +% Original year has been given: ``Original work published''. +% \begin{macrocode} (\BOWP{} {#1}% - % Note +% \end{macrocode} +% Insert note. +% \begin{macrocode} \ifx\@empty#2\@empty \else \unskip; {#2}% \fi - % Final parenthesis. - )%% - % +% \end{macrocode} +% Final parenthesis. +% \begin{macrocode} + )% \fi \fi } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -% Original journal + optional note -% Arguments: #1 = year, #2 = journal, #3 = volume, #4 = issue number, -% #5 = formatted pages, #6 = note. +% \begin{macro}{\APACorigjournalnote} +% Original journal + optional note. +% Arguments: |#1| = year, |#2| = journal, |#3| = volume, |#4| = issue number, +% |#5| = formatted pages, |#6| = note. +% \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\APACorigjournalnote}[6]{% - % "(Reprinted from " (note the space) - (\BREPR{} % - % Journal (should not be empty) - \Bem{#2}% - % Year + (\BREPR{} % ``(Reprinted from '' (note the space) + \Bem{#2}% Journal (should not be empty) \ifx\@empty#1\@empty \else - \unskip, {#1}% + \unskip, {#1}% , year \fi - % Volume \ifx\@empty#3\@empty \else - \unskip, \Bem{#3}% + \unskip, \Bem{#3}% , volume \fi - % Issue number \ifx\@empty#4\@empty \else - \unskip{[#4]}% + \unskip{[#4]}% [issue number] \fi - % Pages \ifx\@empty#5\@empty \else - \unskip, {#5}% + \unskip, {#5}% , pages \fi - % Note \ifx\@empty#6\@empty \else - \unskip; {#6}% + \unskip; {#6}% ; note \fi - % Final parenthesis. - )%% - % -} -% -% An auxiliary function: make a comma-separated output list of the -% input, recognizing empty arguments. Must be called with one -% argument, and the argument contains a comma-separated list of elements. -% The elements of this should generally be enclosed in braces. -\def\@connect@with@commas#1{% - % Commas should only be inserted if both sides are nonempty. - \def\@comma@space{\unskip, }% - \let\@connect@string\relax - % Loop over elements. - \@for\@element@:=#1\do{% - \ifx\@empty\@element@% - \else - % Not empty: insert connect string (nothing for the first - % nonempty element, a comma and space afterwards). - \@connect@string\@element@% - \let\@connect@string\@comma@space - \fi - }% - \let\@connect@string\@undefined - \let\@comma@space\@undefined + )% Final parenthesis } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -% Original book + optional note. -% Arguments: -% #1 = year, #2 = formatted editor, #3 = formatted title, -% #4 = formatted edition, #5 = formatted volume, #6 = formatted pages, -% #7 = address, #8 = publisher, #9 = note. +% \begin{macro}{\APACorigbooknote} +% Original book + optional note. Arguments: +% |#1| = year, |#2| = formatted editor, |#3| = formatted title, +% |#4| = formatted edition, |#5| = formatted volume, |#6| = formatted pages, +% |#7| = address, |#8| = publisher, |#9| = note. +% \begin{macrocode} \newcommand{\APACorigbooknote}[9]{% - % - % "(Reprinted from " (note the space) + %% ``(Reprinted from '' (note the space) (\BREPR{} % - % - % Title, edition, volume, pages, editor, year, address: publisher - % These should not all be empty, but this is not checked here - % (because it's done in the .bst file). + %% Title, edition, volume, pages, editor, year, address: publisher +% \end{macrocode} +% These should not all be empty, but this is not checked here, because it's +% done in the \fname{.bst} file. +% \begin{macrocode} \@connect@with@commas{% {#3},{#4},{#5},{#6},{#2},{#1},{\APACaddressPublisher{#7}{#8}}% }%% - % - % Add optional note. \ifx\@empty#9\@empty \else - ; #9% + ; #9%% ; note \fi - % - % Final parenthesis. - )%% - % + )% Final parenthesis. } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{environment}{APACrefannotation} +% Annotations; for annotated bibliographies. Cf.~\citeA[pp.~810--811]{TLC2}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newenvironment{APACrefannotation}{% + \begin{quotation}\noindent\ignorespaces +}{\end{quotation}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{environment} % -% Formatting of Technical Report information. +% \subsection{Various specific style settings and utility macros} % -% Volume, edition, type, number. -% Arguments: #1 = formatted edition + volume, -% #2 = formatted technical report type + number -\newcommand{\APACbVolEdTR}[2]{% - \ifx\@empty#1\@empty - \ifx\@empty#2\@empty +% \begin{macro}{\BAstyle} +% Text style of authors for citations that include the year as well +% (\cmd{\cite}, \cmd{\shortcite}, \cmd{\fullcite}, \cmd{\citeA}, +% \cmd{\shortciteA}, \cmd{\fullciteA}, \cmd{\citeNP}, \cmd{\shortciteNP}, +% \cmd{\fullciteNP}). +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\BAstyle}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BAastyle} +% Text style of authors for \cmd{\citeauthor} and its variants +% (\cmd{\shortciteauthor}, \cmd{\fullciteauthor}, \cmd{\citeauthorNP}, +% \cmd{\shortciteauthorNP}, \cmd{\fullciteauthorNP}). +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\BAastyle}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APACciteatitle} +% \begin{macro}{\APACcitebtitle} +% Formatting of ``article'' and ``book'' titles when they are used in a +% citation, typically when there is no author and the title takes this role. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\APACciteatitle}[1]{``#1''} +\newcommand{\APACcitebtitle}[1]{{\em #1\/}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APACyear} +% \begin{macro}{\APACexlab} +% Formatting of the year and the extra label (`a', `b', etc.) that is used to +% distinguish different works by the same author(s) in the same year. These +% macros have been introduced to solve some problems with \pkg{natbib}'s +% parsing macros. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\APACyear}[1]{{#1}}% +\newcommand{\APACexlab}[1]{{#1}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\theBibCnt} +% \begin{macro}{\BCnt} +% The |BibCnt| counter is used to distinguish multiple citations with the same +% author(s) and year. Using a counter allows the user control over its +% formatting. The default formatting (APA style) is to add roman lowercase +% letters: ``(Kruskal, 1964a, 1964b)''. The \cmd{\protect} is necessary when +% \pkg{natbib} is used. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcounter{BibCnt} +\renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{\alph{BibCnt}} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BCnt}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\theBibCnt} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BCntIP} +% \begin{macro}{\BCntND} +% Variations of \cmd{\BCnt} for in-press and no-date citations. The \cmd{\mbox} +% prevents a line break at the hyphen. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BCntIP}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\theBibCnt}} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BCntND}[1]{\setcounter{BibCnt}{#1}\mbox{-\theBibCnt}} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bibliographytypesize} +% Font size of the references, but this macro can be abused to insert lots of +% other style commands and/or text between the section or chapter heading and +% the actual references as well. +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\bibliographytypesize\normalsize +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bibliographyprenote} +% An optional note just before the references in the reference list (but after +% \cmd{\bibliographytypesize}). It defaults to nothing, but can be changed to +% a list of commands (e.g., if author formatting should be different in the +% reference list) and/or text (e.g., for an explanatory note). +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\bibliographyprenote}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bibleftmargin} +% \begin{macro}{\bibindent} +% \begin{macro}{\bibparsep} +% \begin{macro}{\bibitemsep} +% Declare four length parameters for the reference list and give them default +% values. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newskip{\bibleftmargin} +\newskip{\bibindent} +\newskip{\bibparsep} +\newskip{\bibitemsep} +\bibleftmargin=2.5em +\bibindent=-\bibleftmargin +\bibparsep=0pt% +\bibitemsep\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bibcorporate} +% Formatting of corporate (group) authors. Its primary function is in the +% \BibTeX{} stage. It is recognized by \fname{apacite.bst}, which handles +% such authors slightly differently from ordinary authors. +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\bibcorporate\relax +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BBA} +% Initialize this command, which formats the ``and'' between authors. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\BBA}{\BBAA}% `\&' +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\Bem} +% Emphasis in the bibliography. A relic from \pkg{theapa}. It allows to use +% underlining in the bibliography and italics in the text, but the default is +% italics. +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\Bem\emph +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bibnotype} +% This macro indicates that the type information should be left empty. It is +% used for \entryname{@techreport} and \entryname{@intechreport}, where +% ``\cmd{\BTR}'' is the default type if the field is left empty. As such, it +% primarily modifies the behavior of \fname{apacite.bst}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\bibnotype}{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APACSortNoop} +% \begin{macro}{\bibphant} +% The \cmd{\APACSortNoop} macro can be used to change the sorting order: +% When put between a pair of braces at the beginning of a field, the entry is +% sorted on the argument of this command, but the argument is never displayed. +% \cmd{\bibphant} is the same as \cmd{\APACSortNoop}, so it is not discussed +% in the main documentation. It is only kept for backwards compatibility with +% old versions of \pkg{apacite}, in which it was documented. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\APACSortNoop}[1]{} +\let\bibphant\APACSortNoop +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\makehashother} +% \begin{macro}{\makehashmacropar} +% Setting the catcode of the hash mark `|#|'. This is mainly useful in some +% cases in which the bibliography contains urls containing `|#|' symbols. +% These are analogous to \cmd{\makeatother} and \cmd{\makeatletter}. +% (They are undocumentedin the main documentation!) +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\makehashother{\catcode`\#=12\relax} +\def\makehashmacropar{\catcode`\#=6\relax} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Author index setup and index styles} +% +% Here, the author index options are implemented. It also defines some index +% styles and defines most of the index-related commands to do nothing in case +% no author index is requested. +% +% \begin{macro}{\AX} +% \begin{macro}{\corporateAX} +% \begin{macro}{\@AXfile} +% \begin{macro}{\currentindexname} +% \begin{macro}{\printindex} +% \begin{macro}{\PrintAX} +% \begin{macro}{\orig@printindex} +% \begin{macro}{\APAC@printindex} +% \begin{macro}{\check@printindex} +% Define the author-indexing macros and the index-printing commands. +% \begin{macrocode} +\if@APAC@index +% \end{macrocode} +% Author index requested. +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@APAC@index@package +% \end{macrocode} +% Load \pkg{index} package. +% \begin{macrocode} + \RequirePackage{index}[1995/09/28] +% \end{macrocode} +% Define the author index. This may be changed in the preamble of the +% document (or in a user-provided package) by a \cmd{\renewindex} +% command. +% \begin{macrocode} + \newindex{autx}{adx}{and}{\authorindexname} +% \end{macrocode} +% Author indexing command. Some trial and error and adapting code from +% other packages to get this right, esp.\ when \pkg{hyperref} is also +% loaded. +% \begin{macrocode} + \DeclareRobustCommand{\AX}[1]{% + \if@filesw{% + \protected@write\@auxout{}{% + \string\protected@write\string\tf@autx{}{% + \string\string\string + \indexentry{\string#1|hyperpage}{\thepage}}}% + }% + \fi + }% \else - % (Technical Report No.\ <no>) - {(#2)}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Without the \pkg{index} package, using standard \LaTeX{}. This includes +% a bit of code adapted from \fname{ltidxglo.dtx} and \fname{doc.dtx}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \newwrite\@AXfile + \immediate\openout\@AXfile=\jobname.adx + \typeout + {Writing author index file \jobname.adx }% + \DeclareRobustCommand{\AX}[1]{% + \protected@write\@AXfile{}% + {\string\indexentry{\string#1}{\thepage}}% + }% + \def\PrintAX{\edef\currentindexname{\authorindexname}% + \@input@{\jobname.and}% + \global\let\PrintAX\@empty + }% + \AtBeginDocument{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Make sure that \cmd{\printindex} is defined. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{printindex}{\makeindex}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Now, redefine \cmd{\printindex} to accommodate both \cmd{\printindex} +% without argument and |\printindex[autx]|. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\orig@printindex\printindex + \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\APAC@printindex}{% + \orig@printindex}}% + \def\APAC@printindex[autx]{\PrintAX}% + }% \fi - \else - % (2nd ed., Vol.~1 - ({#1}% - \ifx\@empty#2\@empty +% \end{macrocode} +% Include corporate authors in the author index? +% \begin{macrocode} + \if@APAC@include@corporate + \let\corporateAX\AX \else - % ; Technical Report No.\ <no> - \unskip; {#2}% + \let\corporateAX\@gobble \fi - % Final parenthesis. - )%% - \fi +\else +% \end{macrocode} +% No author index. Wait until |\begin{document}| for checking whether another +% package is loaded that defines \cmd{\printindex}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{printindex}% + {% +% \end{macrocode} +% \cmd{\printindex} has not been defined. Define \cmd{\printindex} so +% that it suppresses the indexes. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{% + \check@printindex[]}}% + \def\check@printindex[#1]{\relax }% + }% + {% +% \end{macrocode} +% \cmd{\printindex} has been defined, so save its definition. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\orig@printindex\printindex +% \end{macrocode} +% Redefine \cmd{\printindex} so that it suppresses the author index +% but does not change other indexes: (1) If there is no optional +% argument, use the original definition. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\printindex{\@ifnextchar[{\check@printindex}{\orig@printindex}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% (2) If there is an optional argument, check whether it is equal to +% ``|autx|''. If so, suppress this (author) index. If not, use the +% original definition. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\check@printindex[#1]{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Use a clumsy way to check whether |#1| = |autx|, but seemingly more +% elegant ways somehow didn't work. +% \begin{macrocode} + \expandafter\def\csname APAC@#1\endcsname{DUMMY}% + \@ifundefined{APAC@autx}% + {\orig@printindex[#1]}% + {\let\APAC@autx\@undefined}% + }% + }% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% Empty author indexing commands. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\AX\@gobble + \let\corporateAX\@gobble +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{environment}{theindex} +% \begin{macro}{\APACstdindex} +% The \envirname{index} environment as defined in the \pkg{index} package; +% literally copied from \fname{index.sty}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\APACstdindex}{% + \@ifclassloaded{article}{% + \renewenvironment{theindex}{% + \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}% + \if@twocolumn + \@restonecolfalse + \else + \@restonecoltrue + \fi + \columnseprule \z@ + \columnsep 35\p@ + \twocolumn[% + \section*{\indexname}% + \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else + \index@prologue + \bigskip + \fi + ]% + \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem + }{% + \if@restonecol + \onecolumn + \else + \clearpage + \fi + } + }{% + \renewenvironment{theindex}{% + \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}% + \if@twocolumn + \@restonecolfalse + \else + \@restonecoltrue + \fi + \columnseprule \z@ + \columnsep 35\p@ + \twocolumn[% + \@makeschapterhead{\indexname}% + \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else + \index@prologue + \bigskip + \fi + ]% + \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem + }{% + \if@restonecol + \onecolumn + \else + \clearpage + \fi + }% + }% } +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} % -% Volume, edition, type, number, pages (for @intechreport). -% Arguments: #1 = formatted edition + volume, -% #2 = formatted technical report type + number, #3 = formatted pages. -\newcommand{\APACbVolEdTRpgs}[3]{% - \ifx\@empty#1\@empty - \ifx\@empty#2\@empty - \ifx\@empty#3\@empty +% \begin{macro}{\APACtocindex} +% The \envirname{index} environment as defined in the \pkg{index} package, but +% with a table of contents entry added. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\APACtocindex}{% + \@ifclassloaded{article}{% + \renewenvironment{theindex}{% + \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}% + \if@twocolumn + \@restonecolfalse + \else + \@restonecoltrue + \fi + \columnseprule \z@ + \columnsep 35\p@ + \twocolumn[% + \section*{\indexname}% + \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else + \index@prologue + \bigskip + \fi + ]% + \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% +% \end{macrocode} +% The following line added by EM. +% \begin{macrocode} + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\indexname}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem + }{% + \if@restonecol + \onecolumn + \else + \clearpage + \fi + } + }{% + \renewenvironment{theindex}{% + \edef\indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}% + \if@twocolumn + \@restonecolfalse + \else + \@restonecoltrue + \fi + \columnseprule \z@ + \columnsep 35\p@ + \twocolumn[% + \@makeschapterhead{\indexname}% + \ifx\index@prologue\@empty\else + \index@prologue + \bigskip + \fi + ]% + \@mkboth{\MakeUppercase\indexname}% + {\MakeUppercase\indexname}% +% \end{macrocode} +% The following line added by EM. +% \begin{macrocode} + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\indexname}% + \thispagestyle{plain}% + \parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem + }{% + \if@restonecol + \onecolumn + \else + \clearpage + \fi + }% + }% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APACemindex} +% An alternative style for the \envirname{index} environment, such that +% automatically a chapter or section title is generated, with a corresponding +% table of contents entry. The index is now in a \envirname{multicol} +% environment. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\APACemindex}{% + \RequirePackage{multicol} + \renewenvironment{theindex}{% + \edef\@indexname{\the\@nameuse{idxtitle@\@indextype}}% + \@ifundefined{chapter}% + {\section*{\@indexname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\@indexname}% +%% \sectionmark{{\@indexname}}% doesn't work: generates numbers + }% + {\chapter*{\@indexname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@indexname}% +%% \chaptermark{{\@indexname}}% doesn't work: generates numbers +%% % (except in the backmatter) +%% \sectionmark{{\@indexname}}% doesn't work: generates numbers + }% + \@mkboth{{\@indexname}}{{\@indexname}}% Hence we need this. + \parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem + \setlength{\columnsep}{2em} + \small + \begin{multicols}{2} + \raggedright + }% + {\end{multicols}\normalsize + }% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APACltxemindex} +% A variation on \cmd{\APACemindex}, but without using the \pkg{index} package, +% which conflicts with the standard \LaTeX{} documentation classes. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\APACltxemindex}{% + \RequirePackage{multicol} + \renewenvironment{theindex}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% The index naming scheme of the \pkg{index} package is also absent. +% Therefore, try to guess an index name. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{currentindexname}{% + \@ifundefined{indexname}{% + \edef\@indexname{Index}% + }{\edef\@indexname{\indexname}}% + }{\edef\@indexname{\currentindexname}}% + \@ifundefined{chapter}% + {\section*{\@indexname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{\@indexname}% +%% \sectionmark{{\@indexname}}% doesn't work: generates numbers + }% + {\chapter*{\@indexname}% + \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{\@indexname}% +%% \chaptermark{{\@indexname}}% doesn't work: generates numbers +%% % (except in the backmatter) +%% \sectionmark{{\@indexname}}% doesn't work: generates numbers + }% + \@mkboth{{\@indexname}}{{\@indexname}}% Hence we need this. + \def\pfill{\relax{}}% + \parindent\z@ + \parskip\z@ \@plus .3\p@\relax + \let\item\@idxitem + \setlength{\columnsep}{2em} + \small + \begin{multicols}{2} + \raggedright + }% + {\end{multicols}\normalsize + }% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{environment} +% +% \subsection{Formatting of urls} +% +% \begin{macro}{\Url@force@Tilde} +% \begin{macro}{\Url@APACdot} +% \begin{macro}{\Url@APACcomma} +% \begin{macro}{\Url@APACquestionmark} +% \begin{macro}{\Url@APACexclamation} +% \begin{macro}{\Url@APAChyphen} +% \begin{macro}{\Url@APACunderscore} +% \begin{macro}{\APACurlBreaks} +% \begin{macro}{\url@APACttstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\url@APACrmstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\url@APACsfstyle} +% \begin{macro}{\url@APACsamestyle} +% The APA manual requires breaking of urls \emph{after} a slash or +% \emph{before} a dot. In particular, there should not be a break between +% ``|http:|'' and ``|//|''. This differs from the standard line breaking +% style of the \pkg{url} package. Therefore, we define an APA-style for +% url formatting here. (Maybe this should be part of the \pkg{apa} class, +% but urls occur most often in the reference list, so we do it here.) +% The \pkg{url} package also defines many other (punctuation) symbols at +% which a line break may occur. The APA manual does not mention these, but +% it seems in the spirit of the APA manual to use these as well. See also +% \citeA[pp.~645--646]{chicago}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{url}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% To circumvent an ``undefined'' error. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{Url@force@Tilde}{\def\Url@force@Tilde{\relax}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% The original dot. Simply using `|.|' causes an infinite loop. This command +% is used below, so that encoding-issues can be resolved easier by redefining +% \cmd{\Url@APACdot}. The same argument holds for the other punctuation +% marks. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\Url@APACdot{\mathchar"2E }% + \def\Url@APACcomma{\mathchar"2C }% + \def\Url@APACquestionmark{\mathchar"3F }% + \def\Url@APACexclamation{\mathchar"21 }% + \def\Url@APAChyphen{\mathchar"2D }% + \def\Url@APACunderscore{\_}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Define the APA-style line breaks for urls. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\APACurlBreaks{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Remove dot (`|.|') and slash (`|/|') from the ordinary breaks and add +% the slash to the big breaks, so that |http://| is broken after the second +% slash instead of after the colon. The \cmd{\UrlNoBreaks} and +% \cmd{UrlOrds} are the default ones from the \pkg{url} package, but they +% are repeated here to obtain a complete style, so that we don't have to +% rely on what is the \pkg{url} default (which might change). +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\UrlBreaks{\do\@\do\\\do\|\do\;\do\>\do\]\do\)\do\'\do+\do\=\do\#}% + \def\UrlBigBreaks{\do\/\do\:\do@url@hyp}% + \def\UrlNoBreaks{\do\(\do\[\do\{\do\<}% \) + \def\UrlOrds{\do\*\do\~\do\'\do\"}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Define the dot as an empty binary relation (after which a break may +% occur) followed by a dot-symbol (after which no break may occur). +% \citeA{chicago} requires the same treatment of a few other punctuation +% marks, different from \pkg{url}'s default behavior. We implement these +% as well. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\UrlSpecials{% + \do\.{\mathbin{}\Url@APACdot }% + \do\,{\mathbin{}\Url@APACcomma }% + \do\-{\mathbin{}\Url@APAChyphen }% + \do\?{\mathbin{}\Url@APACquestionmark }% + \do\!{\mathbin{}\Url@APACexclamation }% + \do\_{\mathbin{}\Url@APACunderscore }% + \do\ {\Url@space}\do\%{\Url@percent}\do\^^M{\Url@space}% + \Url@force@Tilde}% package option may force faked text-ascii-tilde + }%% +% \end{macrocode} +% Change the underscore for when a non-tt font is used. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\Url@OTnonTT{\do\<{\langle}\do\>{\mathbin{\rangle}}\do + \_{\mathbin{}\_}\do\|{\mid}\do\{{\lbrace}\do\}{\mathbin{\rbrace}}\do + \\{\mathbin{\backslash}}\UrlTildeSpecial} +% \end{macrocode} +% Define four APA url-styles, based on the standard styles in +% \fname{url.sty}, and use the |APACtt|-style as default. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\url@APACttstyle{\def\UrlFont{\ttfamily}\APACurlBreaks }% + \def\url@APACrmstyle{\def\UrlFont{\rmfamily}\APACurlBreaks }% + \def\url@APACsfstyle{\def\UrlFont{\sffamily}\APACurlBreaks }% + \def\url@APACsamestyle{\def\UrlFont{}\APACurlBreaks }% + \urlstyle{APACtt}% + }{}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\url} +% In case \cmd{\url} is undefined, define a very simple version. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{url}{% + \def\url#1{\texttt{#1}}% + }{}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsection{Compatibility code} +% +% Many other packages redefine citation commands and reference list commands, +% or at least affect them, even if that is not their core business. This leads +% to all kinds of compatibility problems. Here, these are repaired. +% +% \subsubsection{\pkg{babel}} +% +% From \fname{hyperref.dtx}: +% \begin{quote} +% Package \pkg{babel} redefines \cmd{\bibcite} with macro +% \cmd{\bbl@cite@choice}. It needs to be overwritten to avoid the warning +% ``Label(s) may have changed.''. +% \end{quote} +% Here, a slightly adapted version of the code mentioned above is inserted. The +% other \cmd{\bibcite}-restoring compatibility code above does something +% similar, but does not do the job correctly if \pkg{babel} is loaded (why?). +% This only works if \pkg{babel} is loaded before \pkg{apacite}; putting it in +% a \cmd{\AtBeginDocument} does not work well. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{bbl@cite@choice}{}{% + \g@addto@macro\bbl@cite@choice{% + \let\bibcite\APACbibcite + }% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{\pkg{natbib}} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Redefine a \pkg{natbib} command. This may be ethically dubious, but without +% it, \pkg{natbib} simply cannot handle \pkg{apacite}-generated \fname{.bbl} +% files. The only reason I can think of why both \pkg{apacite} and \pkg{natbib} +% would be loaded is exactly the situation when you want to use \pkg{natbib} +% for the citations and \pkg{apacite} for the reference list. In this +% situation you would load \fname{apacite.sty}, not for the citation commands, +% but for the punctuation commands and labels defined by \pkg{apacite}. In this +% situation, the redefinition below is necessary and therefore I do this here. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\NAT@parse@date#1#2#3#4#5#6@@{% + \def\NAT@year{{#1}}\def\NAT@exlab{{#2}}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \pkg{natbib} redefines \cmd{\thebibliography}, which interferes a little with +% our purposes. Therefore, add some patches. This goes wrong if +% \cmd{\bibpreamble} is redefined later on, i.e., by the user, but I haven't +% come up with a better hack yet. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\@oldbibpreamble\bibpreamble + \def\bibpreamble{% + \@oldbibpreamble% + \bibliographytypesize% + \bibliographyprenote% + \@ifundefined{APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + {}% skip + {\csname APAC@metaprenote@\APAC@extra@b@citeb\endcsname}% + }% + \let\@old@endthebibliography\endthebibliography + \def\endthebibliography{\@old@endthebibliography% + \normalsize}% + }{}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{\pkg{hyperref}} +% +% The code here is adapted from \pkg{hyperref}, \pkg{natbib}, and their +% respective documentation, to make use of their interoperability. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{NAT@parse}{% + \def\NAT@parse{This is a fake natbib command to fool hyperref.}}{}% + \@ifundefined{hyper@natlinkstart}{% + \let\hyper@natlinkstart\@gobble}{}% + \@ifundefined{hyper@natlinkend}{% + \let\hyper@natlinkend\relax}{}% + \@ifundefined{hyper@natanchorstart}{% + \let\hyper@natanchorstart\@gobble}{}% + \@ifundefined{hyper@natanchorend}{% + \let\hyper@natanchorend\relax}{}% + \@ifundefined{hyperpage}{% + \def\hyperpage#1{#1}}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Remove spaces from hyperlinks (\pkg{hyperref} keeps them, even if they are +% removed from the visible output, so you'd get awkward results like +% |\href{http://my .link}{http://my.link}|). +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{hyperref}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% The next should always be true, but just to be sure\ldots +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifpackageloaded{url}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Is \pkgoption{obeyspaces} option requested? If not, then remove spaces +% from hyperlinks. +% \begin{macrocode} + \ifx\@empty\Url@ObeySp\@empty + \def\url@#1{\def\@tmp@arg{\string#1}% + \HyPsd@Subst{ }{}{\@tmp@arg}% + \hyper@linkurl{\Hurl{#1}}{\@tmp@arg}}% + \fi + }{}% + }{}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{\pkg{backref}} +% +% \begin{macro}{\back@cite} +% \begin{macro}{\CurrentBib} +% \begin{macro}{\PrintBackRefs} +% \begin{macro}{\APACrestorebibitem} +% A bit of code that makes life a little easier, adapted from +% \fname{amsrefs.dtx}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\back@cite{}% +\def\CurrentBib{}% +\def\PrintBackRefs{}% +\def\APACrestorebibitem{}% +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{backref}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Make sure that \cmd{\ifBR@verbose} is defined. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{ifBR@verbose}{% + \let\ifBR@verbose\iffalse + \let\fi\fi}{}% +% \end{macrocode} +% A backcite command that makes the code of other commands better readable. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\back@cite#1{% + \ifBR@verbose + \PackageInfo{backref}{back cite \string`#1\string'}% + \fi + \Hy@backout{#1\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% Adaptation of the \cmd{\bibitem} command so that \pkg{backref} does not +% scan the whole entry. The placement of the backrefs is explicitly done +% through \cmd{\PrintBackRefs}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\APACrestorebibitem{% + \def\BR@@lbibitem[##1]##2{% + \BRorg@bibitem[{##1}]{##2}% + \def\CurrentBib{##2\APAC@extra@b@citeb}% + }% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% Printing the backrefs: Revert to the standard \pkg{backref} macro. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\PrintBackRefs#1{\BR@backref{#1}}% + }{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Else: \pkg{backref} not loaded. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\back@cite\@gobble + \let\PrintBackRefs\@gobble + }% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BR@@lbibitem} +% Frankly, at the moment, I do not completely understand why we need this. But +% I'm sure it was for a good reason when I included this. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\BR@@lbibitem[#1]#2#3\par{% + \BRorg@bibitem[#1]{#2}#3% + \BR@backref{#2}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{\pkg{chapterbib}} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@extra@b@citeb} +% \begin{macro}{\@extra@binfo} +% From the instructions of the \pkg{chapterbib} package. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{@extra@b@citeb}{\def\@extra@b@citeb{}}{} +\gdef\@extra@binfo{} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APAC@extra@b@citeb} +% \begin{macro}{\APAC@extra@binfo} +% Replacements of the \pkg{chapterbib} \cmd{\@extra@b@citeb} and +% \cmd{\@extra@binfo} commands. These accumulate all kinds of additional flags +% to accommodate multiple bibliographies of various packages (\pkg{chapterbib}, +% \pkg{bibunits}, \pkg{multibbl}). +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\APAC@extra@b@citeb{\APAC@curr@aux\APAC@bu\@extra@b@citeb}% +\def\APAC@extra@binfo{\APAC@curr@aux\APAC@bu\@extra@binfo}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{\pkg{bibunits}} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APACstd@cite} +% \begin{macro}{\APACstd@nocite} +% \begin{macro}{\APACstd@lbibitem} +% \begin{macro}{\APAC@bu} +% Store the standard \pkg{apacite} definitions. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtEndOfPackage{% + \let\APACstd@cite\cite + \let\APACstd@nocite\nocite + \let\APACstd@lbibitem\@lbibitem +} +% \end{macrocode} +% Default definition, if \pkg{bibunits} is not loaded. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{APAC@bu}{\def\APAC@bu{}}{} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{bibunits}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% To mimic \pkg{chapterbib} behavior (with flags etc.). +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\APAC@bu{% + \ifx\cite\std@cite +% \end{macrocode} +% Outside a bibunit. The ``|@APACbu|'' strings are intended to minimize +% the possibility of wrong matches, such as |\b@ex11| = |ex11| from the +% global aux or |\b@ex11| = |ex1| from bibunit~1. The last `|@|' is +% similarly intended to avoid confusion if both \pkg{bibunits} and +% \pkg{chapterbib} are loaded (``|11@1|'' = 11th bibunit, 1st +% \pkg{chapterbib} unit; ``|1@11|'' = 1st bibunit, 11th +% \pkg{chapterbib} unit). It seems unlikely that both packages would be +% used at the same time, but safety first. +% \begin{macrocode} + @APACbu0@% + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% Within a bibunit: Use bibunit number to distinguish the bibunits. +% \begin{macrocode} + @APACbu\the\@bibunitauxcnt @% + \fi + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% Standard \pkg{apacite} definition of the \cmd{\cite} and \cmd{\nocite} +% commands. The latter is mainly necessary to avoid incorrect ``Citation +% undefined'' warnings. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\std@cite\APACstd@cite + \let\std@nocite\APACstd@nocite +% \end{macrocode} +% Restore the \pkg{apacite} definition of \cmd{\bibitem}, mainly because of +% the \cmd{\@newciteauxhandle} instead of \cmd{\@auxout}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\std@lbibitem[#1]#2{% + \let\@APACtemp@auxout\@newciteauxhandle + \let\@newciteauxhandle\@bibunitaux + \APACstd@lbibitem[#1]{#2}% + \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp@auxout + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% To make sure everything works whether \pkg{bibunits} is loaded before or +% after \pkg{apacite}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\@lbibitem\std@lbibitem + }{}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{\pkg{bibtopic}} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{bibtopic}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Somewhat rudely disable this command to prevent an undesired error +% message of \pkg{bibtopic}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \renewcommand*\bt@change@thb{\relax}% + }{% +% \end{macrocode} +% These \pkg{bibtopic} hooks are included in the +% \envirname{thebibliography} environment as generated by +% \fname{apacite.bst}, so \pkg{bibtopic} should work correctly. If +% \pkg{bibtopic} is not loaded, they should do nothing. +% \begin{macrocode} + \providecommand{\bt@beg@thb@hook}{\relax} + \providecommand{\bt@end@thb@hook}{\relax} + }% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{\pkg{multibbl}} +% +% Almost all of \pkg{multibbl}'s code is redefined here, mainly because +% \pkg{apacite} needs to distinguish which citation refers to which +% bibliography, so that flags can be correctly set whether a citation +% is the first citation to the work from the specific bibliography and +% correctly includes the meta-analysis flags with the various +% bibliographies. +% +% \begin{macro}{\APAC@curr@aux} +% Default flag definition if \pkg{multibbl} is not loaded. +% \begin{macrocode} +\@ifundefined{APAC@curr@aux}{\def\APAC@curr@aux{}}{} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{multibbl}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% To mimic \pkg{chapterbib} behavior (with flags etc.). +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\APAC@def@curr@aux#1{\def\APAC@curr@aux{@APACaux@#1@}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \begin{macro}{\newbibliography} +% Ditto. This puts the \cmd{\bibcite} commands in |#1.aux| instead of in +% the main \fname{.aux} file, so that the flags can be differentiated. +% This also means that the \fname{.aux} file has to be read by \LaTeX{} +% before it is overwritten. +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\newbibliography#1{% + \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}% + \@input@{#1.aux}% + \begingroup + \if@filesw + \expandafter\newwrite\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname + \expandafter\immediate\openout + \csname #1@auxfile\endcsname #1.aux\relax + \typeout{Writing auxiliary file #1.aux }% + \fi + \endgroup + }%% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APAC@mbbl@bibliography} +% \begin{macro}{\bibliography} +% Add the flag to the bibliography. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\APAC@mbbl@bibliography\bibliography + \def\bibliography#1#2#3{% + \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}% + \let\@APACtemp@auxout\@newciteauxhandle + \def\@APACtemp{\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname}% + \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp + \APAC@mbbl@bibliography{#1}{#2}{#3}% + \let\@newciteauxhandle\@APACtemp@auxout + }%% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@orig@@cite} +% \begin{macro}{\@@cite} +% Add an extra argument to \cmd{\@@cite}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\@orig@@cite\@@cite + \def\@@cite<#1>[#2]#3#4{% + \nocite{#3}{#4}% + \let\@temp@nocite\nocite + \let\nocite\@gobble + \APAC@def@curr@aux{#3}% + \@orig@@cite<#1>[#2]{#4}% + \let\nocite\@temp@nocite + \let\@temp@nocite\@undefined + }%% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@orig@nocite} +% \begin{macro}{\nocite} +% Add an extra argument to \cmd{\nocite}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\@orig@nocite\nocite + \def\nocite#1#2{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Define a flag. +% \begin{macrocode} + \APAC@def@curr@aux{#1}% +% \end{macrocode} +% No flag-setting in \cmd{\nocite}: A no-cite is not a citation, +% so a subsequent citation may be the first citation. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@bsphack + \ifx\@onlypreamble\document +% \end{macrocode} +% Since we are after |\begin{document}| we can do the citations: +% \begin{macrocode} + \@for\@citeb:=#2\do{% + \edef\@citeb{\expandafter\@firstofone\@citeb}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \cmd{\@newciteauxhandle} for compatibility with \pkg{multibib}; +% |#1@auxfile| for compatibility with \pkg{multibbl}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{#1@auxfile}{% + \if@filesw + \immediate\write\@newciteauxhandle{\string\citation{\@citeb}}% + \fi + }{\if@filesw + \expandafter\immediate% + \write\csname #1@auxfile\endcsname{\string\citation{\@citeb}}% + \fi + }% + \@ifundefined{b@\@citeb\APAC@extra@b@citeb}{% + \edef\B@my@dummy{*}% + \ifx\@citeb\B@my@dummy + \else + \G@refundefinedtrue + \@latex@warning{Citation `\@citeb' undefined}% + \fi + }{}% + }% \else - % (pp. 10--30) - {(#3)}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \pkg{apacite} has no compatibility problems with \LaTeX~2.09, +% because it does not work with \LaTeX~2.09 anyway, so we can do the +% following, suggested in \fname{ltbibl.dtx}: +% \begin{macrocode} + \AtBeginDocument{\nocite{#1}{#2}}% \fi + \@esphack +% \end{macrocode} +% For compatibility with \pkg{multibib}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@restore@auxhandle + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\@orig@nocitemeta} +% \begin{macro}{\nocitemeta} +% Add an extra argument to \cmd{\nocitemeta}. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\@orig@@nocitemeta\nocitemeta + \def\nocitemeta#1#2{% + \nocite{#1}{#2}% + \let\@temp@nocite\nocite + \let\nocite\@gobble + \@orig@@nocitemeta{#2}% + \let\nocite\@temp@nocite + \let\@temp@nocite\@undefined + }% + }{}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{\pkg{multibib}} +% +% From the instructions in \fname{multibib.dtx}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\providecommand\@newciteauxhandle{\@auxout} +\def\@restore@auxhandle{\gdef\@newciteauxhandle{\@auxout}} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifundefined{newcites}{\global\let\@restore@auxhandle\relax}{}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% List of citation commands. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\@mb@citenamelist{% + cite,fullcite,shortcite,citeNP,fullciteNP,shortciteNP,% + citeA,fullciteA,shortciteA,citeauthor,fullciteauthor,shortciteauthor,% + citeauthorNP,fullciteauthorNP,shortciteauthorNP,% + citeyear,citeyearNP,nocite,nocitemeta% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsubsection{\pkg{splitbib}} +% +% Presumably, this wouldn't hurt without \pkg{splitbib} as well. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% + \@ifpackageloaded{splitbib}{% + \def\citeauthoryear{\string\citeauthoryear}% + }{}% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% +% \subsection{Language-specific macros and loading of language file} +% \label{sec:language-code} +% +% This section initializes a number of macros that are likely to be subject +% to redefinition in the language-specific files. Most of these are fairly +% obvious, particularly literal text strings, but some style issues are +% language-specific as well, e.g., whether or not a comma should be inserted +% before the last author. After initializing these macros, \pkg{apacite} tries +% to infer which language-specific (\fname{.apc}) file must be loaded, if any, +% and then loads this file. +% +% \subsubsection{Literal text strings} +% +% \begin{macro}{\refname} +% \begin{macro}{\bibname} +% \begin{macro}{\authorindexname} +% The section/chapter headings to be used for the reference list and the +% author index. One of the first two is typically already defined by the +% document class (e.g., \fname{article.cls} defines \cmd{\refname}, +% \fname{book.cls} defines \cmd{\bibname}. When using \pkg{babel}, these are +% both redefined at each \cmd{\selectlanguage} invocation. The +% language-specific (\fname{.apc}) file typically should override that, because +% the strings defined by \pkg{babel} are often not the same as the strings +% prescribed by the style guides for Psychology. For example, the standard +% definition of \cmd{\bibname} in English is ``Bibliography'', whereas the +% APA insists on ``References'' (with a few exceptions). In other languages, +% the \cmd{\refname} may also be defined differently from the \pkg{babel} +% definition. See the various \fname{.apc} files for how \pkg{babel} is +% overridden. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\refname{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\def\bibname{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. +\newcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APACmetaprenote} +% A note used just before the references in the reference list when a +% meta-analysis is reported. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + References marked with an asterisk indicate studies included in + the meta-analysis.} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bibmessage} +% \begin{macro}{\bibcomputerprogram} +% \begin{macro}{\bibcomputerprogrammanual} +% \begin{macro}{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual} +% \begin{macro}{\bibcomputersoftware} +% \begin{macro}{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual} +% \begin{macro}{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual} +% \begin{macro}{\bibprogramminglanguage} +% Commands for specific types of \entryname{@misc} entries. Besides the strings +% themselves (as language-specific text), these are significant in that they +% are recognized by \fname{apacite.bst} and used to modify the formatting of +% the corresponding reference list entries. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg}% Message, for internet forums and the like +\newcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computer program} +\newcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Computer program manual} +\newcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computer program and manual} +\newcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Computer software} +\newcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Computer software manual} +\newcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computer software and manual} +\newcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programming language} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\bibnodate} +% \begin{macro}{\BIP} +% Two types of ``special'' years: ``no date'' and ``in press''. These are not +% only text strings unlike normal years, but also are recognized by +% \fname{apacite.bst} and treated differently there. Here and in many other +% macros below, the \cmd{\hbox} ensures that \TeX{} does not interpret the +% final period as a sentence-ending period, and thus does not insert the extra +% space associated with that. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}}% no date +\newcommand{\BIP}{in press} % in press +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BOthers} +% \begin{macro}{\BOthersPeriod} +% ``and others''. The argument contains a period to suppress an additional one +% in the reference list, i.e., it is used as |\BOthers{.}| and the period in the +% argument is seen by \BibTeX{}, which does not insert an additional one, so +% that we now correctly get |et al.| and not |et al..| in the reference list. +% The difference between \cmd{\BOthers} and \cmd{\BOthersPeriod} is that the +% latter is used in a context where there should always be a period at the +% end. Given that \BibTeX{} does not insert it because of the mentioned usage +% of a period in the argument, this explicit distinction is necessary here. +% Hence, if an unabbreviated string is used to define these commands, their +% definitions become different. For example, +% \begin{verbatim} +% \renewcommand{\BOthers}{and others} +% \renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}{and others.} +% \end{verbatim} +% This does not work perfectly if \cmd{\citeauthor} is used at the end of a +% sentence. This is on the todo-list. For the moment, the user will have to +% employ an explicit workaround, i.e., insert an additional period if +% \cmd{\BOthers} does not contain one and omit this period if it does. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others'' +\newcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others.'', with a period +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BIn} +% \begin{macro}{\Bby} +% Used for ``In Editor (Ed.), \emph{Booktitle}'' and +% ``by Editor, Ed., \emph{Booktitle}'', respectively. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\BIn}{In} % for ``In '' editor... +\newcommand{\Bby}{by} % for ``by '' editor... (in reprints) +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BED} +% \begin{macro}{\BEDS} +% \begin{macro}{\BTRANS} +% \begin{macro}{\BTRANSS} +% \begin{macro}{\BTRANSL} +% \begin{macro}{\BCHAIR} +% \begin{macro}{\BCHAIRS} +% Various types of non-author contributions. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}} % editor +\newcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}} % editors +\newcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.\hbox{}} % translator +\newcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trans.\hbox{}} % translators +\newcommand{\BTRANSL}{trans.\hbox{}} % translation, for the year field +\newcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair} % chair of symposium +\newcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs} % chairs +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BVOL} +% \begin{macro}{\BVOLS} +% \begin{macro}{\BNUM} +% \begin{macro}{\BNUMS} +% \begin{macro}{\BEd} +% \begin{macro}{\BCHAP} +% \begin{macro}{\BCHAPS} +% \begin{macro}{\BPG} +% \begin{macro}{\BPGS} +% Various strings that indicate what kind of number is given. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}} % volume (of a multi-volume book) +\newcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}} % volumes +\newcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}} % number (of a technical report) +\newcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}} % numbers +\newcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}} % edition +\newcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}} % chapter (for electronic documents) +\newcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}} % chapters +\newcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}} % page +\newcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}} % pages +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BTR} +% \begin{macro}{\BPhD} +% \begin{macro}{\BUPhD} +% \begin{macro}{\BMTh} +% \begin{macro}{\BUMTh} +% Various strings that indicate what kind of work is referenced. +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Default technical report type name. +\newcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}} +%% Default PhD thesis type name. +\newcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation} +%% Default unpublished PhD thesis type name. +\newcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation} +%% Default master's thesis type name. +\newcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis} +%% Default unpublished master's thesis type name. +\newcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BAuthor} +% ``Author'', the string used for the publisher if the publisher is also the +% author of the work. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\BAuthor}{Author}% ``Author'' if publisher = author +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BOWP} +% \begin{macro}{\BREPR} +% Two strings that are used for reprints and translations. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\BOWP}{Original work published} +\newcommand{\BREPR}{Reprinted from} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BAvailFrom} +% \begin{macro}{\BRetrieved} +% \begin{macro}{\BMsgPostedTo} +% Strings that indicate where on the internet the referenced document was +% obtained. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Available from\ }% Websites; note the space. +%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked. +\newcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Retrieved {#1}, from\ }% Websites; note the space. +\newcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Message posted to\ }% Messages; note the space. +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Punctuation} +% +% Most of this is more style-specific than language specific, but there are +% some punctuation differences between different languages, or even +% ``dialects'' (in \pkg{babel}'s terminology) of the same ``language''. +% Therefore, these are all included here and redefined in the \fname{.apc} +% files. +% +% \begin{macro}{\BBOP} +% \begin{macro}{\BBCP} +% Opening and closing parentheses. Used to enclose the whole citation for a +% parenthetical citation (e.g., \cmd{\cite}), only the year and post-note for +% in-text citations (e.g., \cmd{\citeA}), and the year (and month and day, if +% present) in the reference list. If different punctuation is desired for +% the reference than used in citations, these commands can be redefined +% immediately before the location of the \cmd{\bibliography} command. If +% different punctuation is desired for parenthetical citations than for in-text +% citations (seems unlikely), the citation commands themselves have to be +% redefined. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\BBOP}{(} % opening parenthesis +\newcommand{\BBCP}{)} % closing parenthesis +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BBOQ} +% \begin{macro}{\BBCQ} +% Opening and closing quotes for article-type titles in the reference list. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\BBOQ}{} % opening quote for article title +\newcommand{\BBCQ}{} % closing quote for article title +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BBAA} +% \begin{macro}{\BBAB} +% \begin{macro}{\BAnd} +% Three forms of ``and''. Of course, the word ``and'' is a literal text string, +% so this part could also have been allocated to the the section that handles +% those. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\BBAA}{\&} % between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list +\newcommand{\BBAB}{and} % between authors in in-text citation +\newcommand{\BAnd}{\&} % for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BPBI} +% \begin{macro}{\BHBI} +% Punctuation between initials. This is primarily used to reduce or eliminate +% space between initials. Note that there is currently not a similar command +% for the last period after the initials, so that removing the periods in these +% macros will generally give undesirable results. +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\BAP} +% \begin{macro}{\BBAY} +% \begin{macro}{\BBYY} +% \begin{macro}{\BBC} +% \begin{macro}{\BBN} +% \begin{macro}{\BAP} +% \begin{macro}{\BAP} +% Punctuation between various parts of citations and reference list entries. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\BAP}{ } % after prefix, before first citation +\newcommand{\BBAY}{, } % between author(s) and year +\newcommand{\BBYY}{, } % between years of multiple citations with same author +\newcommand{\BBC}{; } % between cites +\newcommand{\BBN}{, } % before note +\newcommand{\BCBT}{,} % comma between authors in ref. list when no. of + %% authors = 2 +\newcommand{\BCBL}{,} % comma before last author when no. of authors > 2 +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Date formatting} +% +% This consists of literal strings (names of the months), relative ordering of +% year, month, and day, and punctuation between the elements. +% +% \begin{macro}{\APACmonth} +% This takes one argument. If it is a number between 1 and 12, the name of +% the corresponding month is produced (1 = January, \dots, 12 = December), +% and 13--16 represent the seasons. Anything else is copied literally. In this +% way, other kinds of dates can be handled as well, such as +% ``August/September''. Note that this in its turn can be flexibly entered +% as |\APACmonth{08}/\APACmonth{09}| in the \fname{.bib} file. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or January\or February\or March\or + April\or May\or June\or July\or August\or September\or October\or + November\or December\or Winter\or Spring\or Summer\or Fall\else + {#1}\fi} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APACrefYearMonthDay} +% Year, month, and day in the reference list. Often used for newspaper articles +% and presentations at conferences. By default, this results in something like +% ``(2005, July~5)''. The month and day should be seen as parenthetical +% refinements of the year, so that in other languages, the year should be +% named first as well, regardless of the conventions for representing dates in +% such languages. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{% + {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty \else - % (Technical Report No.\ <no>, pp. 10--30) - (\@connect@with@commas{{#2},{#3}})% + \unskip, {#3}% day \fi \else - % (2nd ed., Vol.~1 - ({#1}% - \ifx\@empty#2\@empty - \ifx\@empty#3\@empty - \else - % ; pp. 10--30 - \unskip; {#3}% - \fi + \unskip, {#2}% month + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty \else - % ; Technical Report No.\ <no>, pp. 10--30 - \unskip; \@connect@with@commas{{#2},{#3}}% + \unskip~{#3}% day \fi - % Final parenthesis. - )%% \fi + {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APACdate} +% A date in the ordinary form, like \cmd{\today}. This is needed for processing +% the \fieldname{lastchecked} field. Should be able to handle dates in both +% typical \LaTeX{} input format (|2005/07/05|) and ISO format +% (|2005-07-05|, possibly with time after it, which will be ignored). Maybe +% other formats as well; e.g., |20050705|, as in the Un*x |touch| command. +% Not yet implemented. +% \end{macro} +% +% \subsubsection{Ordinal numbers} +% +% Some functions, for use with the \fieldname{edition} field, which transform +% a (cardinal) number (``1'', ``2'', \dots) to an ordinal number (``1st'', +% ``2nd'', \dots). +% +% I copied the functions here literally from \fname{amsrefs.dtx} (starting +% with \cmd{\PrintEdition} there) and made only one slight adaptation: removing +% \cmd{\editiontext}. In the \APACversiondate{2007/09/03} version of +% \pkg{apacite}, \cmd{\PrintOrdinal} and \cmd{\print@ordinal} were called +% \cmd{\PrintCardinal} and \cmd{\print@cardinal}, respectively, and what is +% called ``ordinal'' now was called ``cardinal''. This terminology was copied +% from the documentation of \pkg{amsrefs}, but it is incorrect and has +% therefore been changed in the current version. This causes a slight +% incompatibility between versions of \pkg{apacite}. So in case users have +% redefined one of these macros to fit their own needs, they should rename +% these accordingly. Note, however, that the current version of \pkg{apacite} +% redefines these macros in the language-specific files, so for most users, +% this will presumably be sufficient. +% +% \begin{macro}{\@xp} +% Abbreviation. +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\@xp\expandafter +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\PrintOrdinal} +% \begin{macro}{\print@ordinal} +% \begin{macro}{\CardinalNumeric} +% \begin{macro}{\keep@last@digit} +% |\PrintOrdinal{2}| gives ``2nd'', etc. If the argument is not an integer +% number, it is copied literally to the output. At least, apparently, because +% I do not really understand how it works. The \pkg{amsrefs} documentation +% suggests that \cmd{\CardinalNumeric} already gives the ordinal number +% (incorrectly called ``cardinal number'' there), and the name +% \cmd{\CardinalNumeric} without `|@|' sign likewise suggests that it is a +% user command, but some tests using this give garbage. Therefore, +% \cmd{\PrintOrdinal} (a slight adaptation of \pkg{amsrefs}' +% \cmd{\PrintEdition}) is the command that ultimately should be used. +% \begin{macrocode} +\newcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{% + \afterassignment\print@ordinal + \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil +} +\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{% + \ifx\relax#1\relax + \ifnum\count@>\z@ + \CardinalNumeric\count@ + \else + ??th% + \fi + \else + \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi + #1#2\relax + \fi +} +\newcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{% + \number#1\relax + \if + \ifnum#1<14 + \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi + \else + F% + \fi + T% + th% + \else + \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax + \ifcase#1th\or st\or nd\or rd\else th\fi + \fi +} +\def\keep@last@digit#1#2{% + \ifx\relax#2% + \@xp\@gobbletwo + \else + #1=#2\relax + \fi + \keep@last@digit#1% +} +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% +% Load language dependent sections from an external file. Based on code by +% Stefan Bj\"ork [2004/12/25], although heavily modified. +% \begin{macrocode} +\AtBeginDocument{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Both \pkg{babel} and \pkg{(n)german} use \cmd{\iflanguage} to check the main +% language. They both also use \cmd{\languagename}, but that gives more +% problems with ``dialects''. For example, if \cmd{\languagename} = |austrian| +% then |\iflanguage{german}{Yes}{No}| gives Yes. This allows us to provide only +% \fname{.apc} files for the language class without complicated code to check +% whether a certain ``dialect'' is used. +% +% Check whether \cmd{\iflanguage} is defined. If not, no language support +% is offered. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{iflanguage}% + {\relax }% + {% +% \end{macrocode} +% Some \TeX{} distributions automatically preload \pkg{babel} with default +% language ``|nohyphenation|'', so this language should revert to doing +% nothing. Strangely enough, \cmd{\iflanguage} does not work correctly, so +% I'll use a trick. (Some trial and error, because \fname{babel.dtx} states +% that there must be a ``\verb*+\string +'' before the ``|nohyphenation|'', +% but apparently in this situation this is not the case.) +% \begin{macrocode} + \edef\APAC@tmp{nohyphenation}% + \ifx\languagename\APAC@tmp + \else +% \end{macrocode} +% Check whether $\langle$\cmd{\languagename}$\rangle$\fname{.apc} exists. +% If so, load this file. +% \begin{macrocode} + \InputIfFileExists{\languagename.apc}{}{% +% \end{macrocode} +% Else, i.e., $\langle$\cmd{\languagename}$\rangle$\fname{.apc} does not +% exist. Try whether the current language is a dialect of one of the +% known languages. This is not perfect, because languages for which no +% hyphenation patterns have been found revert to the default language, +% so that the wrong language file may be loaded here in that case. Also, +% |UKenglish| uses different hyphenation patterns from |english|. I have +% to find a better way to solve this. +% +% \begin{macro}{\APAC@iflang} +% Define a modification of \cmd{\iflanguage} that executes the ``true'' +% code if the language is defined and equal to the current language and +% does nothing otherwise. (Just \cmd{\iflanguage} gives an error if the +% language is not loaded.) +% \begin{macrocode} + \def\APAC@iflang##1##2{% + \expandafter\ifx\csname l@##1\endcsname\relax + \else + \ifnum\csname l@##1\endcsname=\language + {##2}% + \fi + \fi + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% \begin{macro}{\APAC@apcfile} +% Define the language support file. The \cmd{\def} instead of a direct +% \cmd{\input} is done to provide a mechanism to check whether any +% language file has been defined. +% \begin{macrocode} + \APAC@iflang{dutch}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{dutch.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{finnish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{finnish.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{french}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{french.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{german}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{german.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{ngerman}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{ngerman.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{greek}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{greek.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{norsk}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{norsk.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{spanish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{spanish.apc}}% + \APAC@iflang{swedish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{swedish.apc}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% The hyphenation patterns for UK English are different from +% US English, so this needs to be accommodated explicitly to avoid a +% warning. Australian, New Zealand, and Canadian all use either the +% British or American hyphenation patterns, so do not need to be +% treated separately here. +% \begin{macrocode} + \APAC@iflang{UKenglish}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{english.apc}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% The default English as the last one. If a language is loaded without +% hyphenation patterns, the English hyphenation patterns are used by +% default in \pkg{babel}. In such a case, both this particular +% language and English give a hit. Having English as the last one +% means that in such a case, \pkg{apacite} assigns English, +% corresponding with \pkg{babel}'s default. +% \begin{macrocode} + \APAC@iflang{english}{\gdef\APAC@apcfile{english.apc}}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% +% Give a warning if the process so far has not resulted in a target +% language file, or if the target language file cannot be found. +% \begin{macrocode} + \@ifundefined{APAC@apcfile}{% + \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{% + No suitable language definition file (\languagename.apc) found}% + }{% + \InputIfFileExists{\APAC@apcfile}{}{% + \PackageWarningNoLine{apacite}{% + Language definition file \APAC@apcfile\space not found}% + }% + }% +% \end{macrocode} +% Clear up some macros that are no longer needed. +% \begin{macrocode} + \let\APAC@apcfile\@undefined + }% + \fi + \let\APAC@tmp\@undefined + }% + \let\APAC@iflang\@undefined } %% %</package> % \end{macrocode} % +% % \section{Documentation package (\fname{apacdoc.sty})} % The \pkg{apacdoc} package is written for generating the \pkg{apacite} % user's manual. But it also contains a few commands that are too @@ -8138,59 +9011,6 @@ short form, of the examples. \APACcitebtitle{\DSMshorttitle{#1}}% } -% \newcommand{\DSMciteA}[1]{% -% \@for\@citec:=#1\do{% -% % Check whether citation is defined. -% \@ifundefined{flag@\@citec\@extra@b@citeb}% -% {\citeA{\@citec}}% -% {\citeauthor{\@citec}}% -% }% -% } -% -% \newcommand{\DSMfullciteA}[1]{% -% \fullciteA{#1}% -% } -% -% \newcommand{\DSMshortciteA}[1]{% -% \shortciteauthor{#1}% -% } -% -% \newcommand{\DSMcite}[1]{% -% {\BBOP}% -% \@for\@citec:=#1\do{% -% % Check whether citation is defined. -% \@ifundefined{flag@\@citec\@extra@b@citeb}% -% {\citeNP{\@citec}}% -% {\citeauthor{\@citec}}% -% }% -% {\BBCP}% -% } -% -% \newcommand{\DSMfullcite}[1]{% -% \fullcite{#1}% -% } -% -% \newcommand{\DSMshortcite}[1]{% -% {\BBOP}\shortciteauthor{#1}{\BBCP}% -% } -% -% \newcommand{\DSMciteNP}[1]{% -% \@for\@citec:=#1\do{% -% % Check whether citation is defined. -% \@ifundefined{flag@\@citec\@extra@b@citeb}% -% {\citeNP{\@citec}}% -% {\citeauthor{\@citec}}% -% } -% } -% -% \newcommand{\DSMfullciteNP}[1]{% -% \fullciteNP{#1}% -% } -% -% \newcommand{\DSMshortciteNP}[1]{% -% \shortciteauthor{#1}% -% } - %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% %%% DOCUMENT-SPECIFIC DEFINITIONS %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% @@ -8219,6 +9039,7 @@ short form, of the examples. \newcommand{\LC}{\mbox{${}^{\dag}$}}% \LaTeX{} Companion \newcommand{\X}{\ensuremath{\times}}% for one table \newcommand{\Y}{\ensuremath{c}}% for one table +\newcommand{\A}{\ensuremath{a}}% for one table \newcommand{\pkg}[1]{\textsf{#1}}% package name \newcommand{\fname}[1]{\texttt{#1}}% file name @@ -8325,6 +9146,7 @@ short form, of the examples. %</docpkg> % \end{macrocode} % +% % \section{Language definition files} % % This section describes the code for the language-specific files @@ -8341,17 +9163,18 @@ short form, of the examples. %% %% english.apc - english version of apacite elements %% Written by Erik Meijer -%% Changes since the [2005/06/01] version: -%% - Uncommented all the \renewcommand's, so that the file can be -%% \input to override previous definitions. -%% - Replaced `.{}' by `.\hbox{}', with the same goal (but now it works) -%% of tricking TeX to make sure the abbreviation period is not -%% interpreted as a sentence-ending period. -%% - Inserted many percent signs to make sure no undesired space is -%% put into the document when this file is read. -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. -%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst. +%% +\makeatletter +\renewcommand{\refname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index}% Name of Author Index +%% +%% A note before the references if a meta-analysis is reported. +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + References marked with an asterisk indicate studies + included in the meta-analysis.}% +%% +%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. \renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg}% \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computer program}% \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Computer program manual}% @@ -8360,17 +9183,14 @@ short form, of the examples. \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Computer software manual}% \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computer software and manual}% \renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programming language}% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Other labels +%% +%% Other labels \renewcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}}% % ``no date'' -\renewcommand{\BBAB}{and}% % between authors in text -\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BIP}{in press}% % used as year for in-press citations +\renewcommand{\BIP}{in press}% % ``in press'' +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others'' +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others'' with a period \renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% % for ``In '' editor... \renewcommand{\Bby}{by}% % for ``by '' editor... (in reprints) -\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}}% % chapter -\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}}% % chapters \renewcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}}% % editor \renewcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}}% % editors \renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Trans.\hbox{}}% % translator @@ -8383,40 +9203,215 @@ short form, of the examples. \renewcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}}% % number \renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}}% % numbers \renewcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}}% % edition +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}}% % chapter +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}}% % chapters \renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}% % page \renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}% % pages -\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}}% % (default) technical report type name -\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation}% (default) PhD thesis type name -\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation}% -\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis}% (default) master's thesis type name -\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis}% -\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Author}% Used if publisher = author +%% Default technical report type name. +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}} +%% Default PhD thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Doctoral dissertation} +%% Default unpublished PhD thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unpublished doctoral dissertation} +%% Default master's thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Master's thesis} +%% Default unpublished master's thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unpublished master's thesis} +%% +\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Author}% ``Author'' if publisher = author \renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original work published}% \renewcommand{\BREPR}{Reprinted from}% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List -\renewcommand{\refname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. -\renewcommand{\bibname}{References}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% - References marked with an asterisk indicate studies - included in the meta-analysis.}% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index -\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Author Index}% +\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Available from\ }% Websites; note the space. +%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked. +\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Retrieved {#1}, from\ }% Websites; note the space. +\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Message posted to\ }% Messages; note the space. +%% +%% Punctuation +\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title +\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title +\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{and}% between authors in in-text citation +\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials +\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation +\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year +\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author +\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% between cites +\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{,}% comma between authors in ref. list when no. of + %% authors = 2 +\renewcommand{\BCBL}{,}% comma before last author when no. of authors > 2 +%% +%% Date formatting +\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or January\or February\or March\or + April\or May\or June\or July\or August\or September\or October\or + November\or December\or Winter\or Spring\or Summer\or Fall\else + {#1}\fi}% +\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{% + {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#3}% day + \fi + \else + \unskip, {#2}% month + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + \unskip~{#3}% day + \fi + \fi + {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis +}% +%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2nd') +\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{% + \afterassignment\print@ordinal + \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil +}% +\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{% + \ifx\relax#1\relax + \ifnum\count@>\z@ + \CardinalNumeric\count@ + \else + ??th% + \fi + \else + \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi + #1#2\relax + \fi +}% +\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{% + \number#1\relax + \if + \ifnum#1<14 + \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi + \else + F% + \fi + T% + th% + \else + \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax + \ifcase#1th\or st\or nd\or rd\else th\fi + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Differences between different versions of English, in particular British +% and Australian vs.\ the default American. +% \begin{macrocode} +\def\APAC@tempb{US}% +\edef\APAC@tempa{\string UKenglish}% +\ifx\languagename\APAC@tempa + \def\APAC@tempb{UK}% +\fi +\edef\APAC@tempa{\string british}% +\ifx\languagename\APAC@tempa + \def\APAC@tempb{UK}% +\fi +\def\APAC@tempa{UK} +\ifx\APAC@tempa\APAC@tempb + \renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% no comma before `\&' in British + \renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% no comma before `\&' in British +% \end{macrocode} +% According to \pkg{babel}'s \fname{english.dtx}, in UK English, the date +% is of the form 1st~January, although I thought January~1st was more common. +% \begin{macrocode} + \renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{% + {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#2}% month + \fi + \else + \unskip, {\PrintOrdinal{#3}}% day + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip~{#2}% month + \fi + \fi + {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis + }% +\fi +%% +\edef\APAC@tempa{\string australian}% +\ifx\languagename\APAC@tempa + \def\APAC@tempb{AU}% +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% New Zealand is equivalent to Australian for our purposes. +% \begin{macrocode} +\edef\APAC@tempa{\string newzealand}% +\ifx\languagename\APAC@tempa + \def\APAC@tempb{AU}% +\fi +\def\APAC@tempa{AU} +\ifx\APAC@tempa\APAC@tempb + \renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% no comma before `\&' in AU/NZ (?) + \renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% no comma before `\&' in AU/NZ (?) +% \end{macrocode} +% According to \pkg{babel}'s \fname{english.dtx}, In Australian and New +% Zealand, the date is of the form 1~January. +% \begin{macrocode} + \renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{% + {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#2}% month + \fi + \else + \unskip, {#3}% day + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip~{#2}% month + \fi + \fi + {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis + }% +\else + \immediate\typeout{NOT AUSTRALIAN!!!}% for checking that it works +\fi +% \end{macrocode} +% Clear up some macros that are no longer needed. +% \begin{macrocode} +\let\APAC@tempa\@undefined +\let\APAC@tempb\@undefined %% %</english> % \end{macrocode} % % +% % \subsection{\fname{dutch.apc}} % % This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite} % for the Dutch language. The \pkg{babel} package considers Afrikaans % as a ``dialect'' of Dutch, but my limited knowledge of Afrikaans % suggests that most words are spelt differently (though are phonetically -% similar), and many other words are simply different. So I doubt if this -% file can be directly applied to Afrikaans. +% similar), and many other words are simply different. So I doubt whether +% this file can be directly applied to Afrikaans. +% +% For compiling the translated elements, the following sources were +% used: +% \begin{enumerate} +% \item Instructions for the Dutch psychology journal ``De Psycholoog'' +% \cite{DePsych01}; indicated below as ``DP''. +% \item Instructions for the Dutch psychology journal ``Nederlands Tijdschrift +% voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden'' \cite{NTPG04}; +% indicated below as ``NTPG''. +% \item Instructions from the well-known book +% \APACcitebtitle{Schrijfwijzer} \cite[pp.~404--410]{Renk02}; +% indicated below as ``SW''. +% \item The previous three all state that their rules are adapted from the +% APA manual. For translations that are not explicitly mentioned in +% these sources, I used the extensive reference list from \citeA{Schr04}. +% \item Finally, I consulted the \emph{Van Dale} English-Dutch dictionary +% \cite{VanDale89}. +% \end{enumerate} % % \begin{macrocode} %<*dutch> @@ -8424,52 +9419,45 @@ short form, of the examples. %% dutch.apc - dutch translation of apacite elements %% Written by Erik Meijer %% -%% For compiling the translated elements, the following sources were -%% used: -%% -%% (1) Instructions for Dutch psychology journal "De Psycholoog" -%% (indicated below as "[DP]"): -%% -%% Uitgebreide richtlijnen voor het aanleveren van kopij [Extensive -%% guidelines for the submission of manuscripts]. (2001). -%% Retreived January 3, 2005, from -%% http://upload.lectric.nl/data/nip7/Richtlijnen%20voor%20auteurs.pdf -%% -%% (2) Instructions for Dutch psychology journal "Nederlands Tijdschrift -%% voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden" -%% (indicated below as "[NTPG]"): -%% -%% Aanwijzingen voor auteurs [Directions for authors]. (2004). -%% Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden, -%% 59, inside back cover. -%% -%% (3) Instructions (pp. 404-410) from the following well-known book -%% (indicated below as "[SW]"): +%% DP = De Psycholoog +%% NTPG = Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden +%% SW = Schrijfwijzer %% -%% Renkema, J. (2002). Schrijfwijzer [Writing indicator] (4th ed.). -%% Den Haag, The Netherlands: Sdu. +\makeatletter %% -%% These three all state that their rules are adapted from the APA manual. -%% For translations that are not explicitly mentioned in these sources, -%% I used the extensive reference list from the following article: -%% -%% (4) Schrooten, M. G. S., & Smulders, F. T. Y. (2004). Een experimentele -%% kijk op angst: Aandacht en automatisme in de verwerking van -%% bedreigende stimuli -%% [Anxiety from an experimental point of view: Attention and -%% automaticity in the processing of threatening stimuli]. -%% Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar Grensgebieden, -%% 59, 135-149. +% \end{macrocode} +% +% Name of the reference list according to DP and NTPG. +% SW gives the following general names: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% ``Literatuuropgave'' [literally approx. ``Literature specification''] +% \item +% ``Literatuurlijst'' [literally ``Literature list''] +% \end{itemize} +% For more specific applications, SW gives the following names: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% ``Bibliografie'' [``Bibliography'', ``a more or less complete survey +% of publications in a certain area''] +% \item +% ``Geraadpleegde literatuur'' [``Consulted literature''] +% \item +% ``Aangehaalde literatuur'' [``Referenced literature''] +% \end{itemize} +% +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatuur}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literatuur}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Auteursindex}% Name of author index %% -%% Finally, I consulted the following dictionary: +%% A note before the references if a meta-analysis is reported. %% -%% (5) Groot woordenboek Engels-Nederlands [Large dictionary English-Dutch] -%% (2nd ed.). (1989). Utrecht, The Netherlands: Van Dale. +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + Met een asterisk gemarkeerde referenties betreffen studies die in de + meta-analyse zijn gebruikt.}% %% -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. -%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst. +%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. \renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Bericht}% \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramma}% \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Handleiding van computerprogramma}% @@ -8478,350 +9466,705 @@ short form, of the examples. \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Handleiding van computersoftware}% \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Computersoftware en handleiding}% \renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmeertaal}% -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Other labels +%% +%% Other labels \renewcommand{\bibnodate}{z.~j.\hbox{}}% [SW] (``zonder jaartal'') -\renewcommand{\BBAB}{en}% -% +\renewcommand{\BIP}{te verschijnen}% % [SW] \renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% % [DP] \renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% % [DP] %% NTPG requires the following, SW allows both variants: -%\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{e.~a.\hbox{}}% % [NTPG] -%\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{e.~a.\hbox{}}% % [NTPG] -% -\renewcommand{\BIP}{te verschijnen}% % [SW] -\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% -\renewcommand{\Bby}{door}% -\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{hfdst.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{hfdst.\hbox{}}% -% -%% Editor(s) is almost impossible to get right in Dutch, because SW -%% and DP require the translation of ``editor(s)'' to be dependent on -%% the language in which the referenced work is written: -%% ``Red.'' (or ``red.'') for referenced works in Dutch -%% ``Ed.''/``Eds.'' for referenced works in English -%% ``Hrsg.'' for referenced works in German -%% ``edt.'' for referenced works in French -%% NTPG does not give an explicit rule for this, but only an example -%% in which an English work is referenced and ``Ed.'' is used. +%% \renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{e.~a.\hbox{}}% % [NTPG] +%% \renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{e.~a.\hbox{}}% % [NTPG] %% -%% For the moment, I think it makes most sense to give the Dutch versions here: +\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% % for ``In '' editor... +\renewcommand{\Bby}{door}% % for ``by '' editor... (in reprints) +% \end{macrocode} +% +% ``Editor(s)'' is almost impossible to get right in Dutch, because SW +% and DP require the translation of ``editor(s)'' to be dependent on +% the language in which the referenced work is written: +% \begin{itemize} +% \item +% ``Red.'' (or ``red.'') for referenced works in Dutch +% \item +% ``Ed.''/``Eds.'' for referenced works in English +% \item +% ``Hrsg.'' for referenced works in German +% \item +% ``edt.'' for referenced works in French +% \end{itemize} +% NTPG does not give an explicit rule for this, but only an example +% in which an English work is referenced and ``Ed.'' is used. +% +% For the moment, I think it makes most sense to give the Dutch versions here: +% \begin{macrocode} \renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}% % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'') \renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.\hbox{}}% % [DP] (SW gives ``Red.'') +% \end{macrocode} % -%% Translators should not be mentioned according to DP. -%% NTPG does not explain how to format this. -%% SW gives a completely different format: ``Vertaald door: '' -%% followed by the name of the translator, or if the translator is unknown: -%% ``Vertaling van: '' followed by the original title. -%% This is much too complicated, so I'll choose a simple alternative: -\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{vert.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{vert.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{vert.\hbox{}}% -% -\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{voorz.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{voorz.\hbox{}}% -% -% [SW]. NTPG gives an example with ``Vol.'' but this is presumably -% dependent on the language of the referenced work as well. -\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Dl.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Dl.\hbox{}}% % [SW] -\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}% % [SW] -\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}% % [SW] -\renewcommand{\BEd}{dr.\hbox{}}% % [SW] -\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}% % [SW]. [DP] gives ``p.'', [NTPG] both. +% Translators should not be mentioned according to DP. +% NTPG does not explain how to format this. +% SW gives a completely different format: ``Vertaald door:'' +% [``Translated by:''] followed by the name of the translator, or if the +% translator is unknown: ``Vertaling van:'' [``Translation of:''] +% followed by the original title. This is much too complicated, so I'll +% choose a simple alternative. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{vert.\hbox{}}% translator +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{vert.\hbox{}}% translators +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{vert.\hbox{}}% translation, for the year field +%% +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{voorz.\hbox{}}% chair of symposium +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{voorz.\hbox{}}% chairs +% \end{macrocode} +% +% ``Volume'' according to SW. NTPG gives an example with ``Vol.'' but this is +% presumably dependent on the language of the referenced work as well. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Dl.\hbox{}}% volume [SW] +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Dl.\hbox{}}% volumes [SW] +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}% number [SW] +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}% numbers [SW] +\renewcommand{\BEd}{dr.\hbox{}}% edition [SW] +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{hfdst.\hbox{}}% chapter +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{hfdst.\hbox{}}% chapters +\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}% page +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}% pages [SW]. DP gives ``p.'', NTPG both. +% \end{macrocode} % Literally translating ``Tech.'' as ``Technisch'' does not make sense. +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Default technical report type name. \renewcommand{\BTR}{Rapport}% -% Schrooten & Smulders use ``dissertatie'' -\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}% +% \end{macrocode} % There is no Dutch ``DAI'' and the distinction between ``published'' and -% ``unpublished'' would generally be interpreted as ``published as a book -% with an official publisher'' vs. ``privately published''. All PhD theses -% in the Netherlands are required to be published with an ISBN number. -% Therefore, it is better in my view to keep the same term here. -\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}% -\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}% -% Again, there is no official forum to publish abstracts of master's theses, +% ``unpublished'' PhD theses would generally be interpreted as ``published as +% a book with an official publisher'' vs.\ ``privately published''. All PhD +% theses in the Netherlands are required to be published with an ISBN number. +% Therefore, in my view it is better to use the same term for ``published'' +% and ``unpublished''. (\citeNP{Schr04} use ``dissertatie''.) +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Default PhD thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}% ``published'' +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Academisch proefschrift}% ``unpublished'' +% \end{macrocode} +% There is no official forum to publish abstracts of master's theses either, % but, unlike PhD theses, they are (generally) unpublished. % The term used here refers to the Dutch educational system until ca. 2003. -% Since ca. 2004, universities are gradually converting to a bachelor - -% master system, so it's likely that this term will have to be adapted -% in the near future. -\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}% -\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Auteur}% -% [DP]. They also require the original title after the originalyear. -\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Oorspronkelijke editie}% -\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Overgenomen uit}% -% -% SW gives the following general names: -% ``Literatuuropgave'' [literally approx. ``Literature specification''] -% ``Literatuurlijst'' [literally ``Literature list''] -% For more specific applications, SW gives the following names: -% ``Bibliografie'' [``Bibliography'', ``a more or less complete survey -% of publications in a certain area''] -% ``Geraadpleegde literatuur'' [``Consulted literature''] -% ``Aangehaalde literatuur'' [``Referenced literature''] -\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatuur}% [DP & NTPG] -\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literatuur}% [DP & NTPG] -% -\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% - Met een asterisk gemarkeerde referenties betreffen studies die in de - meta-analyse zijn gebruikt.}% -% -\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Auteursindex}% -% -\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% [DP & SW]. NTPG uses the US/APA comma. -\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% [DP & SW]. NTPG uses the US/APA comma. -% +% Since ca. 2004, universities are gradually converting to a +% bachelor--master system, so it's likely that this term will have to be +% adapted in the near future. +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Default master's thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}% ``published'' +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Doctoraalscriptie}% ``unpublished'' +%% +\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Auteur}% ``Author'' if publisher = author +% \end{macrocode} +% From DP. They also require the original title after the +% \fieldname{originalyear}. This is not implemented here. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Oorspronkelijke editie}% Original work published +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Overgenomen uit}% Reprinted from +%% +%% Websites and newsgroups; note the spaces. +\newcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Available from\ }% ??? CHECK!!! +%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked. +\newcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Retrieved {#1}, from\ }% ??? CHECK!!! +\newcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Message posted to\ }% ??? CHECK!!! +%% +%% Punctuation +\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title +\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title +\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{en}% between authors in in-text citation +\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials +\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation +\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year +\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author +\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% between cites +\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note +%% +%% No commas according to DP and SW. NTPG uses the US/APA comma. +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% comma between authors in ref. list when no. of + %% authors = 2 +\newcommand{\BCBL}{}% comma before last author when no. of authors > 2 +%% +%% Date formatting +\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or januari\or februari\or maart\or + april\or mei\or juni\or juli\or augustus\or september\or oktober\or + november\or december\or winter\or lente\or zomer\or herfst\else + {#1}\fi}% +\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{% + {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#2}% month + \fi + \else + \unskip, {#3}% day + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip~{#2}% month + \fi + \fi + {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis +}% +%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to a ordinal one (`2nd') +\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{% + \afterassignment\print@ordinal + \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil +}% +\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{% + \ifx\relax#1\relax + \ifnum\count@>\z@ + \CardinalNumeric\count@ + \else + ??e% + \fi + \else + \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi + #1#2\relax + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Dutch ordinal numbers are always obtained by simply putting an `e' after +% the number, so this (and perhaps the code above) can be significantly +% simplified. However, because I have trouble understanding this code (from +% the \pkg{amsrefs} package) and experimenting did not give the expected +% results, I won't mess with the code too much and stay close to the +% English code. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{% + \number#1\relax + \if + \ifnum#1<14 + \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi + \else + F% + \fi + T% + e% + \else + \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax + \ifcase#1e\else e\fi + \fi +}% %% %</dutch> % \end{macrocode} % % +% % \subsection{\fname{finnish.apc}} % % This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite} -% for the Finnish language. +% for the Finnish language. Based on \citeA[Appendix~E]{KLO05}. % % \begin{macrocode} %<*finnish> %% %% finnish.apc - finnish version of apacite elements +%% Written by Kari Pyykk\"o %% -%% Reference: Appendix E from book +\makeatletter +\renewcommand{\refname}{Viitteet}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Viitteet}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Tekij\"ahakemisto}% Name of Author Index %% -%% -------------------------------------------------------------------- -%% Kansallinen luetteloinnin ohjausryhm\"a. (2006). Monografioiden -%% kuvailu, Suomalaiset luettelointis\"a\"ann\"ot. Helsinki: BTJ -%% Kirjastopalvelu. -%% -------------------------------------------------------------------- +%% A note before the references if a meta-analysis is reported. +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + Viitteet merkitty t\"ahtimerkeill\"a osoittaen opintojen + sis\"altymist\"a meta-analyysiin.}% %% -%% Written by Kari Pyykk\"o +%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. %% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. -%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst. -% -% Msg +%% Msg \renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Sanoma}% -% -% Computer program +%% +%% Computer program \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Tietokoneohjelma}% -% -% Computer program manual +%% +%% Computer program manual \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Tietokoneohjelman k\"asikirja}% -% -% Computer program and manual +%% +%% Computer program and manual \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Tietokoneohjelma ja k\"asikirja}% -% -% Computer software +%% +%% Computer software \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Ohjelmisto}% -% -% Computer software manual +%% +%% Computer software manual \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Ohjelmiston k\"asikirja}% -% -% Computer software and manual +%% +%% Computer software and manual \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Ohjelmisto ja k\"asikirja}% -% -% Programming language +%% +%% Programming language \renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Ohjelmointikieli}% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Other labels -% -% n.d. -\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{s.a.\hbox{}}% % ``no date'', ``sine anno'' -% -% and -\renewcommand{\BBAB}{ja}% % between authors in text -% -% et al. -\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``others'', the argument contains a - % dot to suppress an additional one - % in the reference list -% -% et al. -\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% - % ``others'', the argument contains - % a dot to suppress an additional one - % in the reference list. The difference - % with \BOthers is that, if another - % string is used to define \BOthers, - % this one should always finish with a - % period and the previous one not - % necessarily (e.g., if explicit - % ``others'' is used). -% -% in press +%% +%% +%% Other labels +%% +%% n.d. +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{s.a.\hbox{}}% ``no date'', ``sine anno'' +%% +%% in press \renewcommand{\BIP}{painossa}% % used as year for in-press citations -% -% In -\renewcommand{\BIn}{Teoksessa}% % for ``In '' editor... -% -% chap. -\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{luku{}}% % chapter -% -% chap. -\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{luvut{}}% % chapters -% -% Ed. -\renewcommand{\BED}{toim.\hbox{}}% % editor -% -% Eds. -\renewcommand{\BEDS}{toim.\hbox{}}% % editors -% -% Trans. -\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{k\"a\"ant.\hbox{}}% translator -% -% Trans. +%% +%% et al.: ``and others'', not necessarily with a period +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% +%% +%% et al.: ``and others'' with a period +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% +%% +%% In +\renewcommand{\BIn}{Teoksessa}% ``In'' editor... +%% +%% by +\renewcommand{\Bby}{teoksesta}% ``by'' editor... (in reprints) +%% +%% Ed. +\renewcommand{\BED}{toim.\hbox{}}% editor +%% +%% Eds. +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{toim.\hbox{}}% editors +%% +%% Trans. +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{k\"a\"ant.\hbox{}}% translator +%% +%% Trans. \renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{k\"a\"ant.\hbox{}}% translators -% -% trans. -\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{k\"a\"an.\hbox{}}% translation, for the year field -% -% Chair -\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{pj.\hbox{}}% % chair of symposium -% -% Chairs -\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{pj.\hbox{}}% % chairs -% -% Vol. -\renewcommand{\BVOL}{osa}% % volume -% -% Vols. -\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{osat}% % volumes -% -% No. -\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nro}% % number -% -% Nos. -\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nro}% % numbers -% -% ed. -\renewcommand{\BEd}{p.\hbox{}}% % edition -% -% p. -\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}% % page -% -% pp. -\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}}% % pages -% -% Tech.\ Rep. -\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tekn.\ rap.\hbox{}}% (default) technical report type name -% -% Doctoral dissertation -\renewcommand{\BPhD}{V\"ait\"oskirja}% (default) PhD thesis type name -% -% Unpublished doctoral dissertation +%% +%% trans. +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{k\"a\"an.\hbox{}}% translation, for the year field +%% +%% Chair +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{pj.\hbox{}}% chair of symposium +%% +%% Chairs +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{pj.\hbox{}}% chairs +%% +%% Vol. +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{osa}% volume +%% +%% Vols. +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{osat}% volumes +%% +%% No. +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nro}% number +%% +%% Nos. +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nro}% numbers +%% +%% ed. +\renewcommand{\BEd}{p.\hbox{}}% edition +%% +%% chap. +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{luku}% chapter +%% +%% chap. +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{luvut}% chapters +%% +%% p. +\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}% page +%% +%% pp. +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}}% pages +%% +%% Tech.\ Rep. +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tekn.\ rap.\hbox{}}% (default) technical report type name +%% +%% (default) PhD thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{V\"ait\"oskirja}% +%% +%% (default) unpublished PhD thesis type name \renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Julkaisematon v\"ait\"oskirja}% - % (default) unpublished PhD thesis - % type name -% -% Master's thesis +%% +%% (default) master's thesis type name \renewcommand{\BMTh}{Pro gradu -tutkielma}% - % (default) master's thesis type name -% -% Unpublished master's thesis +%% +%% (default) unpublished master's thesis type name \renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Julkaisematon pro gradu -tutkielma}% - % (default) unpublished - % master's thesis type name -% -% Original work published +%% +\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Tekij\"a}% ``Author'' if publisher = author +%% +%% Original work published \renewcommand{\BOWP}{Alkuaan julk.\hbox{}}% -% -% Reprinted from +%% +%% Reprinted from \renewcommand{\BREPR}{Uudelleen julk.\hbox{}}% +%% +%% (websites) Available from; note the space. +\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Saatavilla\ }% +%% +%% (websites) Retrieved ... from; note the space. +%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked. +\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Lainattu {#1}, saatavilla\ }% +%% +%% (newsgroups \& forums) Message posted to; note the space. +\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Viesti l\"ahetetty\ }% +%% +%% Punctuation +\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title +\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title +\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list +%% +%% and +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{ja}% between authors in text +%% +\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials +\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation +\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year +\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author +\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% between cites +\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{,}% comma between authors in ref. list when no. of + %% authors = 2 +\renewcommand{\BCBL}{,}% comma before last author when no. of authors > 2 +%% +%% Date formatting, adapted from babel's finnish.dtx +\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or + tammikuuta\or helmikuuta\or maaliskuuta\or huhtikuuta\or + toukokuuta\or kes\"akuuta\or hein\"akuuta\or elokuuta\or + syyskuuta\or lokakuuta\or marraskuuta\or joulukuuta\or +%% Winter Spring Summer Fall + talvea\or kev\"att\"a\or kes\"a\"a\or syksy\"a\else + {#1}\fi}% +\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{% + {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#2}% month + \fi + \else + \unskip, {#3}.% day + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip~{#2}% month + \fi + \fi + {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis +}% +%% +%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2nd') +\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{% + \afterassignment\print@ordinal + \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil +}% +\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{% + \ifx\relax#1\relax + \ifnum\count@>\z@ + \CardinalNumeric\count@ + \else + ??.% + \fi + \else + \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi + #1#2\relax + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% In Finnish, ordinal numbers are always obtained by simply +% putting a period after the number. So I am reusing the German code here. +% As mentioned in the section describing \fname{german.apc}, this (and perhaps +% the code above) can then be significantly simplified, but, because I (EM) +% have trouble understanding this code (from the \pkg{amsrefs} package) and +% experimenting did not give the expected results, I won't mess with the code +% too much and stay close to the English code. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{% + \number#1\relax + \if + \ifnum#1<14 + \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi + \else + F% + \fi + T% + .% + \else + \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax + \ifcase#1.\else .\fi + \fi +}% % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List -\renewcommand{\refname}{Viitteet}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. -\renewcommand{\bibname}{Viitteet}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list -% when a meta-analysis is reported. -% +%% +%</finnish> +% \end{macrocode} % -% References marked with an asterisk indicate studies included in the -% meta-analysis. -\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% - \refname merkitty t\"ahtimerkeill\"a osoittaen opintojen - sis\"altymist\"a meta-analyysiin.}% % -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index +% \subsection{\fname{french.apc}} % -% Author Index -\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Tekij\"ahakemisto}% +% This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite} +% for the French language and its ``dialects'' in \pkg{babel} +% terminology. % +% \begin{macrocode} +%<*french> %% -%</finnish> +%% french.apc - french version of apacite elements +%% Adapted from english.apc by \'Eric Raufaste +%% +\makeatletter +%% +\renewcommand{\refname}{R\'ef\'erences}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{R\'ef\'erences}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. +%% The name (heading) of the Author Index +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Index des auteurs}% +%% +%% A note before the references if a meta-analysis is reported. +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + Les r\'ef\'erences marqu\'ees d'un ast\'erisque indiquent des \'etudes + incluses dans la m\'eta-analyse.}% +%% +%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Logiciel}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Manuel de logiciel}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Logiciel et manuel}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Logiciel}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Manuel de logiciel}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Logiciel et manuel}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Langage de programmation}% +%% +%% Other labels +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{s.~d.\hbox{}}% ``no date'' +\renewcommand{\BIP}{sous presse}% ``in press'' +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others'' +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others'' with a period +\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% % for ``In'' editor... +\renewcommand{\Bby}{par}% % for ``by'' editor... (in reprints) +\renewcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}}% % editor +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}}% % editors +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Trad.\hbox{}}% % translator +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Trad.\hbox{}}% % translators +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{trad.\hbox{}}% % translation, for the year field +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Pr\'es.\hbox{}}% % chair of symposium +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Pr\'es}% % chairs +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}}% % volume +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}}% % volumes +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{N\textsuperscript{o}}% % number +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{N\textsuperscript{os}}% numbers +\renewcommand{\BEd}{\'ed.\hbox{}}% % edition +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{chap.\hbox{}}% % chapter +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{chap.\hbox{}}% % chapters +\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}% % page +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}% % pages +%% Default technical report type name. +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Rapport technique}% +%% Default PhD thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Th\`ese de doctorat}% +%% Default unpublished PhD thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Th\`ese de doctorat non publi\'ee}% +%% Default master's thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{M\'emoire de Master}% +%% Default unpublished master's thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{M\'emoire de Master non publi\'e}% +%% +\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Auteur}%% Used if publisher = author +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{\OE uvre originale publi\'ee en}% +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{R\'eimprim\'e \`a partir de}% +\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Disponible sur\ }% Websites; note the space. +%% Websites; note the space. +%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked. +\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Consult\'e le {#1}, sur\ }% +\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Message post\'e sur\ }% Messages; note the space. +%% +%% Punctuation +\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title +\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title +\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{et}% between authors in text +\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials +\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation +\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year +\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author +\renewcommand{\BBC}{~; }% between cites +\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{,}% comma between authors in ref. list when no. of + %% authors = 2 +\renewcommand{\BCBL}{,}% comma before last author when no. of authors > 2 +%% +%% Date formatting +\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or janvier\or f\'evrier\or mars\or + avril\or mai\or juin\or juillet\or ao\^ut\or septembre\or octobre\or + novembre\or d\'ecembre\or hiver\or printemps\or \'et\'e\or automne\else + {#1}\fi}% +%% Structure taken from definition of \today in frenchb.dtx +\makeatletter +\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{% + {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#2}% month + \fi + \else + \unskip, {#3}% day + \edef\APAC@tempa{#3}% + \edef\APAC@tempb{1}% + \ifx\APAC@tempa\APAC@tempb\@empty {\ier}\fi + \let\APAC@tempa\@undefined + \let\APAC@tempb\@undefined + %% + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip~{#2}% month + \fi + \fi + {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis +}% +%% +%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2nd') +% \end{macrocode} +% Ordinal numbers should all be number + `\textsuperscript{e}', +% except if number = 1, then it is ``1\textsuperscript{er}'' or +% ``1\textsuperscript{re}''. \pkg{babel} provides the +% commands \cmd{\ieme}, \cmd{\ier}, and \cmd{\iere} for formatting this. +% We'll use these commands. +% +% \begin{macro}{\APACfirst} +% \begin{macro}{\PrintOrdinalMale} +% \pkg{apacite} only uses the ordinal numbers for edition numbers, and +% the gender of ``\'edition'' is feminine, so we use the feminine form +% ``1re'' by default. However, we put it in the macro \cmd{\APACfirst}. +% Then we define \cmd{\PrintOrdinalMale} to redefine \cmd{\APACfirst} +% to take the masculine form, then call \cmd{\PrintOrdinal}, and then +% revert again, so that users can use this function for masculine words +% (if desired). +% \begin{macrocode} +\DeclareRobustCommand{\APACfirst}{1\iere}% +\DeclareRobustCommand{\PrintOrdinalMale}[1]{% + \DeclareRobustCommand{\APACfirst}{1\ier}% + \PrintOrdinal{#1}% + \DeclareRobustCommand{\APACfirst}{1\iere}% +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% \end{macro} +% \end{macro} +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{% + \afterassignment\print@ordinal + \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil +}% +\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{% + \ifx\relax#1\relax + \ifnum\count@>\@ne + \CardinalNumeric\count@ + \else + \ifnum1=\count@ + {\APACfirst}% + \else + ??{\ieme}% + \fi + \fi + \else + \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi + #1#2\relax + \fi +}% +\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{% + \number#1\relax + \if + \ifnum#1<14 + \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi + \else + F% + \fi + T% + {\ieme}% + \else + \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax + \ifcase#1{\ieme}\else {\ieme}\fi + \fi +}% +%% +%% In French, there should be a space before a colon `:', so we have to +%% redefine a few macros that insert a colon. +\renewcommand{\APACaddressPublisher}[2]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + %% publisher + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + {#2}% + \fi + %% + \else + %% address + {#1}% + %% publisher + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip{} : {#2}% + \fi + %% + \fi +}% +\let\APACaddressInstitution\APACaddressPublisher +\renewcommand{\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth}[2]{% + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + %% Publisher. This cannot be empty, because it is equal to the + %% author. + {\BAuthor{}}% + %% + \else + %% Address and publisher. These are not empty. + {#1\unskip{} : \BAuthor{}}% + %% + \fi +}% +\let\APACaddressInstitutionEqAuth\APACaddressPublisherEqAuth +%% +%</french> % \end{macrocode} % % % \subsection{\fname{german.apc} and \fname{ngerman.apc}} % % This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite} -% for the German language. There is the traditional orthography (`german') -% and the new orthography (`ngerman'), which are treated as completely -% different languages by \pkg{babel} (unlike, e.g., the two Norwegian -% languages), which presumably has technical reasons. We start with `german'. +% for the German language. These are based on the APA-inspired +% instructions from the \citeA{DGPs07}. There is the traditional orthography +% (`german') and the new orthography (`ngerman'), which are treated as +% completely different languages by \pkg{babel} (unlike, e.g., the two +% Norwegian languages), which presumably has technical reasons. We start +% with `german'. % % \begin{macrocode} %<*german> %% %% german.apc - Deutsche Uebersetzung der Apacite-Elemente -%% Written by Andreas Poege. -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Deutsche Anpassung der Interpunktion und Formatierung -%\renewcommand{\BAstyle}{\scshape}%% Formatierung (Schriftart) Autoren (bei \cite usw, \citeA usw - % \citeNP) -%\renewcommand{\BAastyle}{\scshape}% Formatierung (Schriftart) Autoren (bei \citeauthor usw. -%\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% % Einleitende Klammer (default "(") -%\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% % Abschliessende Klammer (default ")") -%\renewcommand{\BAP}{}% % Zeichen zw. Prefix und Zitat (default Leerzeichen) -%\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% % Zwischen Autoren in Klammern (default "\&") -\renewcommand{\BBAB}{und}% % Zwischen Autoren im Text -\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% % Zwischen Autoren und Jahr(en) (default ",") -%\renewcommand{\BBC}{;{}}% % Zwischen Autoren (mehrere Zitate) (default ";") -%\renewcommand{\BBN}{,{}}% % Zwischen Zitat und Postfix (default ",") -%\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% % Einleitung v. Titel v. Artikel (default "") -%\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% % Abschluss v. Titel. von Artikel (default "") -\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% % Zwischen 2 Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",") -\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% % Zwischen 3 o. mehr Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",") -%\renewcommand{\BAnd}{}% % Zwischen Hg. und Uebers., falls gleich (default "\&") -% Formatierung des Zusatzes bei Werken vom selben Autor aus -% einem Jahr (default "\alph{BibCnt}") -%\renewcommand{\theBibCnt}{{\em\alph{BibCnt}\/}}}% -% Zitation eines Titels (Artikel o. ae.) ohne Autor o. Hg. -% (default in Anführungszeichen) -%\renewcommand{\APACiteatitle}{}% -% Zitation eines Titels (Buch o. ae.) ohne Autor o. Hg. -% (default ist \emph) -%\renewcommand{\APACitebtitle}{}% -% Auszeichnung eines Werkes im Lit.verz. wenn in Metaanalyse -% (default "*") -%\renewcommand{\APACmetastar}{}% -% Verhalten von "\bibnewpage" (default "\clearpage") -%\renewcommand{\bibnewpage}{\newpage}% -% Zwischen Jahren, wenn ein Author und mehrere Jahre -% (default "\BBAY") -%\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Formatierung des Literaturverzeichnisses -% Schriftgröße Literaturverz. (default "\normalsize") -%\renewcommand{\bibliographytypesize}{\footnotesize}% -%\setlength{\bibleftmargin}{2.5em}% % Einzug beim Lit.verz. 2. Zeile (default "2.5em") -%\setlength{\bibindent}{-\bibleftmargin}% Einzug beim Lit.verz. 1. Zeile (default "-\bibleftmargin") -%\setlength{\bibitemsep}{\baselineskip}%% vert. Abstand zwischen Einträgen im Lit.verz. (default "0pt") -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Befehle für die speziellen @misc-Einträge. -%%% Diese Befehle werden von apacite.bst berücksichtigt. -\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg.\hbox{}}% Für misc-Literaturtyp bei type, Newsgroup-, Internet-Messages +%% (German version of apacite elements) +%% Written by Andreas Poege +%% Some additions and adaptations by Erik Meijer. +%% +\makeatletter +%% Bezeichnung fuer das Literaturverzeichnis, falls Section +\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatur}% +%% Bezeichnung fuer das Literaturverzeichnis, falls Chapter +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literaturverzeichnis}% +%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Autorenverzeichnisses +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Autorenregister}% +%% +%% Bemerkung vor Literaturangaben, falls eine Metaanalyse angegeben wurde +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{Literaturangaben mit Stern kennzeichnen + Studien der Metaanalyse.}% +%% +%% Befehle fuer die speziellen @misc-Eintraege. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg.\hbox{}}% Newsgroup-, Internet-Messages \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Computerprogramm}% \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Programm-Handbuch}% \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Computerprogramm und Handbuch}% @@ -8829,23 +10172,22 @@ short form, of the examples. \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Software-Handbuch}% \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Software und Handbuch}% \renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Programmiersprache}% -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Weitere Labels -% Bei Techreport, falls type-Ang. unterdrückt werden soll (default " ") -%\renewcommand{\bibnotype}{ }% -% "`und andere"', das Argument beinhaltet einen Punkt, um einen weiteren im -% Literaturverzeichnis zu unterdruecken +%% +%% Weitere Labels +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{o.\,J.\hbox{}}% "`ohne Jahresangabe"' +\renewcommand{\BIP}{in Druck}% % Jahresangabe bei im Druck bef. Werken +%% +%% "`und andere"', das Argument beinhaltet einen Punkt, um einen weiteren im +%% Literaturverzeichnis zu unterdruecken \renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% -% "`und andere"', das Argument beinhaltet einen Punkt, um einen weiteren im -% Literaturverzeichnis zu unterdruecken. +%% "`und andere"', das Argument beinhaltet einen Punkt, um einen weiteren im +%% Literaturverzeichnis zu unterdruecken. \renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BIP}{in Druck}% % Jahresangabe bei im Druck bef. Werken -\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% % fuer "`In"' Herausgeber... -\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{Kap.\hbox{}}% % Kapitel -\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{Kap.\hbox{}}% % Kapitel -\renewcommand{\BED}{Hg.\hbox{}}% % Herausgeber(in) -\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Hg.\hbox{}}% % Herausgeber(innen) +%% +\renewcommand{\BIn}{In}% % fuer "`In"' Herausgeber... +\renewcommand{\Bby}{von}% % fuer "`von"' Herausgeber... (Nachdruck) +\renewcommand{\BED}{Hrsg.\hbox{}}% % Herausgeber(in) +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Hrsg.\hbox{}}% % Herausgeber(innen) \renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}%% Uebersetzer(in) \renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}% Uebersetzer(innen) \renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"Ubers.\hbox{}}% Uebersetzung (bei der Jahresangabe) @@ -8856,43 +10198,175 @@ short form, of the examples. \renewcommand{\BNUM}{Nr.\hbox{}}% % Nummer \renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nr.\hbox{}}% % Nummern \renewcommand{\BEd}{Aufl.\hbox{}}% % Auflage +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{Kap.\hbox{}}% % Kapitel +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{Kap.\hbox{}}% % Kapitel \renewcommand{\BPG}{S.\hbox{}}% % Seite \renewcommand{\BPGS}{S.\hbox{}}% % Seiten -\renewcommand{\BTR}{Bericht}% % (default) Bezeichnung fuer "`technical report"' -\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Dissertation}% % (default) Bezeichnung fuer Dissertation -% (default) Bezeichnung fuer unveroeffentlichte Dissertation +%% +%% (default) Bezeichnung fuer "`technical report"' +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Bericht}% +%% (default) Bezeichnung fuer Dissertation +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Dissertation}% +%% (default) Bezeichnung fuer unveroeffentlichte Dissertation \renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Unver\"offentlichte Dissertation}% -% (default) Bezeichnung für Abschlussarbeit +%% (default) Bezeichnung fuer Abschlussarbeit \renewcommand{\BMTh}{Diplomarbeit}% -% (default) Bezeichnung für unveroeffentlichte Abschlussarbeit +%% (default) Bezeichnung fuer unveroeffentlichte Abschlussarbeit \renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Unver\"offentlichte Diplomarbeit}% -% -\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Originalausgabe}% % Originalausgabe -\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Nachdruck von}% % Nachdruck von -\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{o.\,J.\hbox{}}% "`ohne Jahresangabe"' -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Literaturverzeichnisses -% Bezeichnung für das Literaturverzeichnis, falls Section -\renewcommand{\refname}{Literatur}% -% Bezeichnung für das Literaturverzeichnis, falls Chapter -\renewcommand{\bibname}{Literaturverzeichnis}% -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Kommando zwischen "Literaturverzeichnis" und den Eintraegen direkt -%%% nach \bibliographytypesize -%\renewcommand{\bibliographyprenote}{}% default nichts -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Bemerkung vor Literaturangeaben, falls eine Metaanalyse angegeben wurde -% -\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{Literaturangaben mit Stern kennzeichnen - Studien der Metaanalyse.}% -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Bezeichnung (heading) des Autorenverzeichnisses -\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Autorenregister}% -% +%% +\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Autor}% % ``Autor'' falls publisher = author +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Originalausgabe}% Originalausgabe +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Nachdruck von}% Nachdruck von +%% Websites; note the spaces. +\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Verf\"ugbar unter\ }% +%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked. +\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Zugriff am {#1} auf\ }% +%% Note that here the English phrase is left untranslated in German. +\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Message posted to\ }% +%% +%% Deutsche Anpassung der Interpunktion und Formatierung +\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% % Einleitende Klammer (default "(") +\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% % Abschliessende Klammer (default ")") +\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% % Einleitung v. Titel v. Artikel (default "") +\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% % Abschluss v. Titel. von Artikel (default "") +\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}%% Zwischen Autoren in Klammern (default "\&") +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{und}% Zwischen Autoren im Text +\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}%% Zwischen Hg. und Uebers., falls gleich (default "\&") +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials +\renewcommand{\BAP}{}% % Zeichen zw. Prefix und Zitat (default Leerzeichen) +\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% Zwischen Autoren und Jahr(en) (default ", ") +\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% Zwischen Jahren, wenn ein Author und mehrere Jahre +\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% Zwischen Autoren (mehrere Zitate) (default "; ") +\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% Zwischen Zitat und Postfix (default ", ") +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% Zwischen 2 Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",") +\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% Zwischen 3 o. mehr Autoren (zus. zu "&", default ",") +%% +%% Date formatting, adapted from babel's germanb.dtx +\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or + Januar\or Februar\or M\"arz\or April\or Mai\or Juni\or + Juli\or August\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Dezember\or + Winter\or Fr\"uhjahr\or Sommer\or Herbst\else {#1}\fi}% +\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{% + {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#2}% month + \fi + \else + \unskip, {#3}.% day + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip~{#2}% month + \fi + \fi + {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis +}% +%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2nd'), +%% adapted from amsrefs.dtx +\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{% + \afterassignment\print@ordinal + \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil +}% +\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{% + \ifx\relax#1\relax + \ifnum\count@>\z@ + \CardinalNumeric\count@ + \else + ??.% + \fi + \else + \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi + #1#2\relax + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% German ordinal numbers are always obtained by simply putting a period after +% the number, so this (and perhaps the code above) can be significantly +% simplified. However, because I (EM) have trouble understanding this code (from +% the \pkg{amsrefs} package) and experimenting did not give the expected +% results, I won't mess with the code too much and stay close to the +% English code. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{% + \number#1\relax + \if + \ifnum#1<14 + \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi + \else + F% + \fi + T% + .% + \else + \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax + \ifcase#1.\else .\fi + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% The DGPs puts a space between the volume and the issue number, +% unlike the APA. So we have to slightly adapt this command. +% (|#1| = journal, |#2| = volume, |#3| = number, |#4| = formatted pages). +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\APACjournalVolNumPages}[4]{% + \Bem{#1}% journal + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip, \Bem{#2}% volume + \fi + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + \unskip\ ({#3})% issue number, with the added leading space + \fi + \ifx\@empty#4\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#4}% pages + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Presumably, for the original journal information of a reprint, a similar +% space needs to be added. +% Arguments: |#1| = year, |#2| = journal, |#3| = volume, |#4| = issue number, +% |#5| = formatted pages, |#6| = note. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\APACorigjournalnote}[6]{% + (\BREPR{} % ``(Reprinted from '' (note the space) + \Bem{#2}% Journal (should not be empty) + \ifx\@empty#1\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#1}% , year + \fi + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \else + \unskip, \Bem{#3}% , volume + \fi + \ifx\@empty#4\@empty + \else + \unskip\ {[#4]}% \ [issue number] + \fi + \ifx\@empty#5\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#5}% , pages + \fi + \ifx\@empty#6\@empty + \else + \unskip; {#6}% ; note + \fi + )% Final parenthesis +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Differences between Austrian and German. (Apparently only the name of +% January---``J\"anner'' vs.\ ``Januar''.) +% \begin{macrocode} +\edef\APACaustrian{\string austrian}% +\ifx\languagename\APACaustrian + \renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or + J\"anner\or Februar\or M\"arz\or April\or Mai\or Juni\or + Juli\or August\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Dezember\or + Winter\or Fr\"uhjahr\or Sommer\or Herbst\else {#1}\fi}% +\fi +\let\APACaustrian\undefined %% %</german> % \end{macrocode} @@ -8906,12 +10380,27 @@ short form, of the examples. %% %% ngerman.apc - german translation of apacite elements (new orthography) %% Written by Erik Meijer, based on instructions of Andreas Poege. -% +%% %% According to Andreas Poege, his file german.apc can also be used %% for the new orthography, so I'll just do this: -% +%% \input{german.apc}% -% +%% +% \end{macrocode} +% Differences between Austrian and German. (Apparently only the name of +% January---``J\"anner'' vs.\ ``Januar''.) This is not picked up in +% \fname{german.apc}, because that file only checks for ``austrian'', +% not for ``naustrian'', so we have to copy it here. +% \begin{macrocode} +\edef\APACaustrian{\string naustrian}% +\ifx\languagename\APACaustrian + \renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or + J\"anner\or Februar\or M\"arz\or April\or Mai\or Juni\or + Juli\or August\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Dezember\or + Winter\or Fr\"uhjahr\or Sommer\or Herbst\else {#1}\fi}% +\fi +\let\APACaustrian\undefined +%% %% %</ngerman> % \end{macrocode} @@ -8927,82 +10416,185 @@ short form, of the examples. %% %% greek.apc - Greek version of apacite elements %% Greek translations by Athanassios Protopapas and Ioannis Dimakos -% -%% NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! NOTE! -%% The Greek strings are in ISO-8859-7 encoding. -\RequirePackage[iso-8859-7]{inputenc}% -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. -%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst. -\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{ÌÞíõìá}% -\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Ëïãéóìéêü}% -\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Åã÷åéñßäéï ëïãéóìéêïý}% -\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Ëïãéóìéêü êáé åã÷åéñßäéï}% -\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Ëïãéóìéêü}% -\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Åã÷åéñßäéï ëïãéóìéêïý}% -\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Ëïãéóìéêü êáé åã÷åéñßäéï}% -\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Ãëþóóá ðñïãñáììáôéóìïý}% -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Other labels -\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{÷ùñßò çìåñïìçíßá}% ``no date'' -\renewcommand{\BBAB}{êáé}% % between authors in text -% ``others'', the argument contains a dot to suppress an additional one -% in the reference list -\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{ê.\ óõí.\hbox{}}% -% ``others'', the argument contains a dot to suppress an additional one -% in the reference list. The difference with \BOthers is that, if another -% string is used to define \BOthers, this one should always finish with a -% period and the previous one not necessarily (e.g., if explicit -% ``others'' is used). -\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{ê.\ óõí.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BIP}{õðü Ýêäïóç}% % used as year for in-press citations -\renewcommand{\BIn}{Óôï}% % for ``In '' editor... -\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{êåö.\hbox{}}% % chapter -\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{êåö.\hbox{}}% % chapters -\renewcommand{\BED}{Åðéì.\hbox{}}% % editor -\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Åðéì.\hbox{}}% % editors -\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Ìôö.\hbox{}}% % translator -\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Ìôö.\hbox{}}% % translators -\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{ìôö.\hbox{}}% % translation, for the year field -\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Ðñüåäñïò}% % chair of symposium -\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Ðñüåäñïé}% % chairs -\renewcommand{\BVOL}{ô.\hbox{}}% % volume -\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{ô.\hbox{}}% % volumes -\renewcommand{\BNUM}{áñ.\hbox{}}% % number -\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{áñ.\hbox{}}% % numbers -\renewcommand{\BEd}{Ýêä.\hbox{}}% % edition -\renewcommand{\BPG}{óåë.\hbox{}}% % page -\renewcommand{\BPGS}{óåë.\hbox{}}% % pages -\renewcommand{\BTR}{Ôå÷.\ Ýêè.\hbox{}}% % (default) technical report type name -\renewcommand{\BPhD}{ÄéäáêôïñéêÞ äéáôñéâÞ}% (default) PhD thesis type name -% (default) unpublished PhD thesis type name -\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Áäçìïóßåõôç äéäáêôïñéêÞ äéáôñéâÞ}% -% (default) master's thesis type name -\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Ìåôáðôõ÷éáêÞ äéðëùìáôéêÞ åñãáóßá}% -% (default) unpublished master's thesis type name -\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Áäçìïóßåõôç ìåôáðôõ÷éáêÞ äéðëùìáôéêÞ åñãáóßá}% -\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Ðñþôç Ýêäïóç ðñùôïôýðïõ}% -\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Áíáôýðùóç áðü}% -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List -\renewcommand{\refname}{Âéâëéïãñáößá}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. -\renewcommand{\bibname}{Âéâëéïãñáößá}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list -% when a meta-analysis is reported. -% -%\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% -% References marked with an asterisk indicate studies -% included in the meta-analysis.} -% -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index -\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{ÅõñåôÞñéï óõããñáöÝùí}% -% +%% +\makeatletter +%% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\renewcommand{\refname}{\textgreek{Bibliograf'ia}}% +%% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{\textgreek{Bibliograf'ia}}% +%% The name (heading) of the Author Index +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{\textgreek{Euret'hrio suggraf'ewn}}% +%% +%% A note before the references if a meta-analysis is reported. +\renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% + \textgreek{Oi ergas'iec pou sumperilamb'anontai sth meta-an'alush + shmei'wnontai me aster'isko}.}% +%% +%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{\textgreek{M'hnuma}}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{\textgreek{Logismik'o}}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{% + \textgreek{Egqeir'idio logismiko'u}}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{% + \textgreek{Logismik'o kai egqeir'idio}}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{\textgreek{Logismik'o}}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{% + \textgreek{Egqeir'idio logismiko'u}}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{% + \textgreek{Logismik'o kai egqeir'idio}}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{% + \textgreek{Gl'wssa programmatismo'u}}% +%% +%% Other labels +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{\textgreek{qwr'ic hmeromhn'ia}}% ``no date'' +\renewcommand{\BIP}{\textgreek{up'o 'ekdosh}}% % ``in press'' +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{\textgreek{k.\ sun.\hbox{}}}% ``and others'' +%% ``and others'' with a period +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{\textgreek{k.\ sun.\hbox{}}}% +\renewcommand{\BIn}{\textgreek{Sto}}%% for ``In'' editor... +% \end{macrocode} +% The current command \cmd{\Bby} is problematic for application in Greek. +% If it is followed by 1 male editor, then it should be ``|\textgreek{toy}|''; +% in the case of 1 female editor, it should be ``|\textgreek{ths}|''; with +% multiple editors, ``|\textgreek{twn}|'' is the correct translation. For +% the moment, let's use the latter, which is gender-neutral and perhaps the +% most common one. Note that a user can apply the sort of tricks that we +% used in section~\ref{sec:xmpl} (Example~69) to make a one-time change to +% the definition of \cmd{\Bby}. See the command \cmd{\bibInstring} in +% section~\ref{sec:apacdoc}. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\Bby}{\textgreek{twn}}% for ``by'' editor... (in reprints) +\renewcommand{\BED}{\textgreek{Epim.\hbox{}}}% % editor +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{\textgreek{Epim.\hbox{}}}% % editors +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\textgreek{Mtf.\hbox{}}}% % translator +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\textgreek{Mtf.\hbox{}}}%% translators +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\textgreek{mtf.\hbox{}}}%% translation +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{\textgreek{Pr'oedroc}}% % chair of symposium +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{\textgreek{Pr'oedroi}}% % chairs +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{\textgreek{t.\hbox{}}}% % volume +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{\textgreek{t.\hbox{}}}% % volumes +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{\textgreek{ar.\hbox{}}}% % number +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{\textgreek{ar.\hbox{}}}% % numbers +\renewcommand{\BEd}{\textgreek{'ekd.\hbox{}}}% % edition +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{\textgreek{kef.\hbox{}}}% % chapter +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{\textgreek{kef.\hbox{}}}% % chapters +\renewcommand{\BPG}{\textgreek{sel.\hbox{}}}% % page +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{\textgreek{sel.\hbox{}}}% % pages +%% Default technical report type name. +\renewcommand{\BTR}{\textgreek{Teq.\ 'ekj.\hbox{}}}% +%% Default PhD thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{\textgreek{Didaktorik'h diatrib'h}}% +%% (default) unpublished PhD thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{\textgreek{Adhmos'ieuth didaktorik'h diatrib'h}}% +%% (default) master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{\textgreek{Metaptuqiak'h diplwmatik'h ergas'ia}}% +%% (default) unpublished master's thesis type name +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{% + \textgreek{Adhmos'ieuth metaptuqiak'h diplwmatik'h ergas'ia}}% +%% ``Author'' if publisher = author +\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{\textgreek{Auto'ekdosh}}% +%% Original work published +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{\textgreek{'Ekdosh prwtot'upou}}% +%% Reprinted from +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{\textgreek{Anat'upwsh ap'o}}% +%% Websites; note the explicit spaces. +\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{\textgreek{Diaj'esimo ap'o}\ }% Available from +%% Retrieved ... from +%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked. +%% Correct only when ``date'' is full, not just month or year +\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{% + \textgreek{Anakt'hjhke stis} {#1}, \textgreek{ap'o}\ }% +% \end{macrocode} +% If a URL follows without any leading words/phrase then this string +% should be OK. If there is any other word before the URL then we +% need to know its gender and number in order to produce the correct +% translation. In the current \pkg{apacite} implementation, this is only +% used with a URL immediately following, so we should be OK. +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Newsgroups, forums, etc.; ``Message posted to ''; note the space. +\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{\textgreek{M'hnyma anarthm'eno se}\ }% +%% +%% Punctuation +\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title +\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title +\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{\textgreek{kai}}% between authors in text +\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials +\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation +\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year +\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author +\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% between cites +\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{,}% comma between authors in ref. list when no. of + %% authors = 2 +\renewcommand{\BCBL}{,}% comma before last author when no. of authors > 2 +%% +%% Date formatting. Adapted from babel's greek.dtx +\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\textgreek{\ifcase #1\or + Ianouar'iou\or Febrouar'iou\or Mart'iou\or April'iou\or + Ma'"iou\or Ioun'iou\or Ioul'iou\or Augo'ustou\or + Septembr'iou\or Oktwbr'iou\or Noembr'iou\or Dekembr'iou\or + Qeim'wnas\or 'Anoixh\or Kaloka'iri\or Fjin'opwro\else + {#1}\fi}}% +\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{% + {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#2}% month + \fi + \else + \unskip, {#3}% day + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip~{#2}% month + \fi + \fi + {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis +}% +%% +% \end{macrocode} +% The ordinal numbers are used only for editions in the current version of +% \pkg{apacite}. Hence, we simply tag a ``|\textgreek{h}|'' to the number. +% We could provide alternative versions later on if desired (see, e.g., +% \fname{french.apc}). +% \begin{macrocode} +%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2h'). +\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{% + \afterassignment\print@ordinal + \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil +}% +\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{% + \ifx\relax#1\relax + \ifnum\count@>\z@ + \CardinalNumeric\count@ + \else + ??\textgreek{h}% + \fi + \else + \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi + #1#2\relax + \fi +}% +\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{% + \number#1\relax + \if + \ifnum#1<14 + \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi + \else + F% + \fi + T% + \textgreek{h}% + \else + \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax + \ifcase#1\textgreek{h}\or \textgreek{h}\else \textgreek{h}\fi + \fi +}% %% %</greek> % \end{macrocode} @@ -9015,221 +10607,377 @@ short form, of the examples. % setup, `norsk' is Bokm{\aa}l and `nynorsk' is a dialect of `norsk'. % This does not seem to reflect the relation between these languages % very well, but for compatibility with \pkg{babel} we use the same -% file stricture, i.e., \fname{norsk.apc} defines both languages. +% file structure, i.e., \fname{norsk.apc} defines both languages. +% +% There are no official Norwegian translations of APA style. Some ideas +% for this translation have been taken from \citeA{UIB08} and \citeA{UiO06}. % % \begin{macrocode} %<*norsk> %% %% norsk.apc - Norwegian Bokmal & Nynorsk versions of apacite elements. -%% Version 1.0. +%% Version 1.1. %% Written by Karl Ove Hufthammer. %% -%% Note: To be in line with Norwegian rules of punctuation -%% a comma is never used before '&' or 'and', and there -%% is no space between initials. The macro for these -%% modifications can be found at the end of this file. -%% Remove them to use a more 'APA-like' style. -%% -%% There are no official Norwegian translations of APA. -%% Some ideas for this translation have been taken from the following sources: -%% -%% http://www.ub.uib.no/felles/IK/APA.pdf -%% http://www.uio.no/studier/emner/medisin/isv/SYKVIT4400/v07/REV_normer_skriftl_arb.pdf - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. -%%% These commands are recognized by apacite.bst. -\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{innlegg} -\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{dataprogram} -\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{dataprogramh\aa{}ndbok} -\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{dataprogram og brukerh\aa{}ndbok} -\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{programvare} -\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{programvareh\aa{}ndbok} -\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{programvare og brukerh\aa{}ndbok} -\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringssprÃ¥k} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Other labels -\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.d.\hbox{}} % ``no date'' -\renewcommand{\BBAB}{og} % between authors in text -\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}} % ``others'', the argument contains a - % dot to suppress an additional one - % in the reference list -\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``others'', the argument contains - % a dot to suppress an additional one - % in the reference list. The difference - % with \BOthers is that, if another - % string is used to define \BOthers, - % this one should always finish with a - % period and the previous one not - % necessarily (e.g., if explicit - % ``others'' is used). -\renewcommand{\BIP}{under publisering} % used as year for in-press citations -\renewcommand{\BIn}{I} % for ``In '' editor... -\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.\hbox{}} % chapter -\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.\hbox{}} % chapters -\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}} % editor -\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.\hbox{}} % editors -\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{oms.\hbox{}} % translator -\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{oms.\hbox{}} % translators -\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{oms.\hbox{}} % translation, for the year field -\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordstyrer} % chair of symposium -\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordstyrere} % chairs -\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.\hbox{}} % volume -\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.\hbox{}} % volumes -\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}} % number -\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}} % numbers -\renewcommand{\BEd}{utg.\hbox{}} % edition -\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}} % page -\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}} % pages -\renewcommand{\BTR}{Teknisk rapport} % (default) technical report type name -\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Akademisk avhandling} - % (default) PhD thesis type name -\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Upublisert akademisk avhandling} - % (default) unpublished PhD thesis - % type name -\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Masteroppgave}% (default) master's thesis type name -\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Upublisert masteroppgave}% - % (default) unpublished - % master's thesis type name -\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publisert} -\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Opptrykk fra} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% The name (heading) of the Reference List +\makeatletter \renewcommand{\refname}{Referanser}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. \renewcommand{\bibname}{Referanser}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -% Prenote used just before the references in the reference list -% when a meta-analysis is reported. -% +%% The name (heading) of the Author Index +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Forfatterregister}% +%% +%% A note before the references if a meta-analysis is reported. \renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% -Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% The name (heading) of the Author Index -\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Forfatterregister} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - -\renewcommand{\BCBT}{} % No comma before & when we have two authors. -\renewcommand{\BCBL}{} % No comma before & when we have three or more authors. -\renewcommand{\BPBI}{.} % Period between initials. No space. - -% Differences between norsk (bokmal) and nynorsk. -\edef\APACnynorsk{\string nynorsk} + Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i + metaanalysen.} +%% +%% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{innlegg}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{dataprogram}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{dataprogramh\aa ndbok}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{dataprogram og brukerh\aa ndbok}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{programvare}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{programvareh\aa ndbok}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{programvare og brukerh\aa ndbok}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringsspr\aa k}% +%% +%% Other labels +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.d.\hbox{}}% ``no date'' +\renewcommand{\BIP}{under publisering}% ``in press'' +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others'' +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{et al.\hbox{}}% ``and others'', with a period +\renewcommand{\BIn}{I}% % for ``In'' editor... +\renewcommand{\Bby}{av}% % for ``by'' editor... (in reprints) +\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}% % editor +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.\hbox{}}% % editors +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{oms.\hbox{}}% % translator +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{oms.\hbox{}}% % translators +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{oms.\hbox{}}% % translation, for the year field +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordstyrer}% % chair of symposium +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordstyrere}% % chairs +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.\hbox{}}% % volume +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.\hbox{}}% % volumes +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}% % number +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}% % numbers +\renewcommand{\BEd}{utg.\hbox{}}% % edition +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.\hbox{}}% % chapter +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.\hbox{}}% % chapters +\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}% % page +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}}% % pages +%% Default technical report type name. +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Teknisk rapport}% +%% Default PhD thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Akademisk avhandling}% +%% Default unpublished PhD thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Upublisert akademisk avhandling}% +%% Default master's thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Masteroppgave}% +%% Default unpublished master's thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Upublisert masteroppgave}% +%% +\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Forfatter}% ``Author'' if publisher = author +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publisert}% Original work published +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Opptrykk fra}% Reprinted from +\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Tilgjengelig fra\ }% Websites; note the space. +%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked. +\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Hentet {#1} fra\ }% Websites; note the space. +\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Innlegg p\aa \ }% Messages; note the space. +% \end{macrocode} +% To be in line with Norwegian rules of punctuation, a comma is never +% used before `\&' or ``and'', and there is no space between initials. +% \begin{macrocode} +%% +%% Punctuation +\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title +\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title +\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{og}% between authors in text +\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.}% Period between initials; no space +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials +\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation +\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year +\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author +\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% between cites +\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% no comma between authors in ref. list when no. of + %% authors = 2 +\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% no comma before last author when no. of authors > 2 +%% +%% Date formatting; adapted from babel's norsk.dtx +\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or + januar\or februar\or mars\or april\or mai\or juni\or + juli\or august\or september\or oktober\or november\or desember\or + vinter\or v{\aa}r\or sommer\or h{\o}st\else + {#1}\fi}% +\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{% + {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#2}% month + \fi + \else + \unskip, {#3}.% day + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip~{#2}% month + \fi + \fi + {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis +}% +%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2nd') +\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{% + \afterassignment\print@ordinal + \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil +}% +\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{% + \ifx\relax#1\relax + \ifnum\count@>\z@ + \CardinalNumeric\count@ + \else + ??.% + \fi + \else + \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi + #1#2\relax + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Norwegian ordinal numbers are always obtained by simply putting a period +% after the number, so this (and perhaps the code above) can be significantly +% simplified. However, because I (EM) have trouble understanding this code (from +% the \pkg{amsrefs} package) and experimenting did not give the expected +% results, I won't mess with the code too much and stay close to the +% English code. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{% + \number#1\relax + \if + \ifnum#1<14 + \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi + \else + F% + \fi + T% + .% + \else + \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax + \ifcase#1.\else .\fi + \fi +}% +%% +%% Differences between norsk (bokmal) and nynorsk. +\edef\APACnynorsk{\string nynorsk}% \ifx\languagename\APACnynorsk - \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{dataprogramhandbok} - \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{dataprogram og brukarhandbok} - \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{programvarehandbok} - \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{programvare og brukarhandbok} - \renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordstyrar} % chair of symposium - \renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordstyrarar} % chairs - \renewcommand{\BMTh}{Masteroppg\aa{}ve}% (default) master's thesis type name - \renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Upublisert masteroppg\aa{}ve}% - \renewcommand{\BREPR}{Opptrykk fr\aa{}} \renewcommand{\refname}{Referansar}% Name of ref. list if it's a section. \renewcommand{\bibname}{Referansar}% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. + \renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Forfattarregister}% \renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% - Referansar merkte med ei stjerne viser til studiar som er med i metaanalysen.} - \renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Forfattarregister} + Referansar merkte med ei stjerne viser til studiar som er med i + metaanalysen.}% + \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{dataprogramhandbok}% + \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{dataprogram og brukarhandbok}% + \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{programvarehandbok}% + \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{programvare og brukarhandbok}% + \renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordstyrar}% % chair of symposium + \renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordstyrarar}% % chairs + %% Default master's thesis type name. + \renewcommand{\BMTh}{Masteroppg\aa ve}% + %% Default unpublished master's thesis type name. + \renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Upublisert masteroppg\aa ve}% + \renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Forfattar}% ``Author'' if publisher = author + \renewcommand{\BREPR}{Opptrykk fr\aa }% Reprinted from + \renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Tilgjengeleg fr\aa \ }% Websites; note the space. + \renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Henta {#1} fr\aa \ }% Websites; note the space. + \renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or + januar\or februar\or mars\or april\or mai\or juni\or + juli\or august\or september\or oktober\or november\or desember\or + vinter\or v{\aa}r\or sommar\or haust\else + {#1}\fi}% \fi \let\APACnynorsk\undefined -% %% %</norsk> % \end{macrocode} % - - - % % \subsection{\fname{spanish.apc}} % % This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite} -% for the Spanish language. +% for the Spanish language. Note that \pkg{apacite}'s usage of |<| and +% |>| for pre-notes, as in |\cite<e.g.,>{jones06}| (inherited from its +% predecessor, \fname{theapa.sty}), conflicts with \pkg{babel}'s +% \pkgoption{spanish} option, which makes |<| and |>| active characters. +% Hence, either you must avoid using prenotes with \pkg{apacite}'s +% construction or you must disable \pkg{babel}'s behavior by inserting +% the command \cmd{\deactivatequoting} after loading \pkg{babel}. % % \begin{macrocode} %<*spanish> %% -%% spanish.apc - Versión española de elementos en apacite -%% Escrito por Jorge López Puga - - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Comandos para tipos específicos de entradas @misc. -%%% Estos comandos son reconocidos por apacite.bst. -%\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msg} -\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Programa informático} -\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Manual de programa informático} -\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Programa informático y manual} -\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Software informático} -\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Manual de software informático} -\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Manual y software informático} -\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Lenguaje de programación} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% Otras etiquetas -%\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{n.d.\hbox{}} % ``no date'' -\renewcommand{\BBAB}{y} % Entre autores en el texto -\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{y cols.\hbox{}} % ``y colaboradores'', El argumento contiene un punto, por tanto, %evita poner uno adicional en la lista de referencias. No obstante %algunas revistas aceptan "et al." que es lo que aparece por defecto -%\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{y cols.\hbox{}}% ``others'', the argument contains - % a dot to suppress an additional one - % in the reference list. The difference - % with \BOthers is that, if another - % string is used to define \BOthers, - % this one should always finish with a - % period and the previous one not - % necessarily (e.g., if explicit - % ``others'' is used). -\renewcommand{\BBAA}{y} % Letra que va entre los autores en las referencias (por defecto "\&") -\renewcommand{\BIP}{en prensa} % Usado como año para citas "en prensa" -\renewcommand{\BIn}{En} % Para ``En '' editor... -\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{cap.\hbox{}} % capítulo -\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{caps.\hbox{}} % capítulos -%\renewcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}} % editor -%\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}} % editors -\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Traduc.\hbox{}} % traductor -\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Traducs.\hbox{}} % traductores -\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{traduc.\hbox{}} % traducción, para el campo año -%\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Chair} % chair of symposium -%\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Chairs} % chairs -%\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}} % volume -%\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}} % volumes -%\renewcommand{\BNUM}{No.\hbox{}} % number -%\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{Nos.\hbox{}} % numbers -%\renewcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}} % edition -%\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}} % page -%\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}} % pages -%\renewcommand{\BTR}{Tech.\ Rep.\hbox{}} % (default) technical report type name -\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Tesis Doctoral} - % (por defecto) PhD thesis type name -\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Tesis doctoral no publicada} - % (por defecto) unpublished PhD thesis - % type name -\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Tesis de master}% (por defecto) master's thesis type name -\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Tesis de master no publicada}% - % (por defecto) unpublished - % master's thesis type name -\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Trabajo original publicado en} -\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Reimpresión de} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% El nombre (del encabezado) de la Lista Referencias -\renewcommand{\refname}{Referencias}% Nombbre de la lista de ref. si es una sección. -\renewcommand{\bibname}{Referencias}% Nomber de la lista de refs. si es un capítulo. - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% - %Nota previa usada justo antes de la lista de referencias si un meta-análisis es usado. -% +%% spanish.apc - Versi\'on espa\~nola de elementos en apacite +%% Escrito por Jorge L\'opez Puga +%% +\makeatletter +%% El nombre (del encabezado) de la Lista Referencias +%% Nombre de la lista de ref. si es una secci\'on. +\renewcommand{\refname}{Referencias}% +%% Nomber de la lista de refs. si es un cap\'{\i}tulo. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Referencias}% +%% El nombre (del encabezado) del \'Indice de Autores. +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{\'Indice de Autores}% +%% Nota previa usada justo antes de la lista de referencias si un +%% meta-an\'alisis es usado. \renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% - Las referencias marcadas con un asterisco indican estudios incluidos en el meta-análisis.} - -%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% -%%% El nombre (del encabezado) del Índice de Autores. -\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{Índice de Autores} + Las referencias marcadas con un asterisco indican estudios incluidos en + el meta-an\'alisis.}% +%% Comandos para tipos espec\'{\i}ficos de entradas @misc. +\renewcommand{\bibmessage}{Msj}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{Programa inform\'atico}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogrammanual}{Manual de programa inform\'atico}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{Programa inform\'atico y manual}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{Software inform\'atico}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{Manual de software inform\'atico}% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{Manual y software inform\'atico}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{Lenguaje de programaci\'on}% +%% +%% Otras etiquetas +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{s.f.\hbox{}}% ``sin fecha'' +\renewcommand{\BIP}{en prensa}% Usado como a\~no para citas ``en prensa'' +%% +%% El argumento contiene un punto, por tanto, evita poner uno adicional en +%% la lista de referencias. No obstante algunas revistas aceptan ``et al.'' +%% que es lo que aparece por defecto. +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{y cols.\hbox{}}% ``y colaboradores'' +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{y cols.\hbox{}}% ``y colaboradores'' +%% +\renewcommand{\BIn}{En}% Para ``En'' editor... +\renewcommand{\Bby}{por}% ``by'' editor (in reprints) +\renewcommand{\BED}{Ed.\hbox{}}% editor +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{Eds.\hbox{}}% editors +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{Traduc.\hbox{}}% traductor +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{Traducs.\hbox{}}% traductores +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{traduc.\hbox{}}% traducci\'on, para el campo a\~no +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{Presidente}% Presidente/a de congreso +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{Presidencia}% Presidencia +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{Vol.\hbox{}}% volume +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{Vols.\hbox{}}% volumes +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{n\sptext{o}}% number +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{n\sptext{os}}% numbers +\renewcommand{\BEd}{ed.\hbox{}}% edition +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{cap.\hbox{}}% cap\'{\i}tulo +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{caps.\hbox{}}% cap\'{\i}tulos +\renewcommand{\BPG}{p.\hbox{}}% page +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{pp.\hbox{}}% pages +%% Default technical report type name. --- Informe T\'ecnico +\renewcommand{\BTR}{Inf.\ T\'ec.\hbox{}}% +%% (por defecto) PhD thesis type name --- Tesis Doctoral +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{Tesis Doctoral}% +%% (por defecto) unpublished PhD thesis type name +%% --- Tesis Doctoral no publicada +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{Tesis Doctoral no publicada}% +%% (por defecto) master's thesis type name --- Tesis de Master +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{Tesis de Master}% +%% (por defecto) unpublished master's thesis type name +%% --- Tesis de Master no publicada +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{Tesis de Master no publicada}% +%% +\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{Autor}% ``Author'' if publisher = author +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Trabajo original publicado en}% Original work published +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{Reimpresi\'on de}% Reprinted from +%% +%% Websites and messages to newsgroups, forums, etc.; note the spaces. +\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Disponible en\ }% Available from +%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked. +\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{Descargado {#1}, de\ }% Retrieved ... from +\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Mensaje colgado en\ }% Message posted to +%% +%% Punctuation +\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title +\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title + +\renewcommand{\BBAA}{y}% Letra que va entre los autores en las referencias +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{y}% Entre autores en el texto +\renewcommand{\BAnd}{y}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{.~}% Period between initials +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials +\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation +\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year +\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author +\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% between cites +\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{,}% comma between authors in ref. list when no. of + %% authors = 2 +\renewcommand{\BCBL}{,}% comma before last author when no. of authors > 2 +%% +%% Date formatting; adapted from babel's spanish.dtx +\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or enero\or febrero\or + marzo\or abril\or mayo\or junio\or julio\or agosto\or + septiembre\or octubre\or noviembre\or diciembre\or + invierno\or primavera\or verano\or oto\~no\else + {#1}\fi}% +\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{% + {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip, {#2}% month --- mes + \fi + \else + \unskip, {#3}% day --- d\'ia + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + \unskip~de {#2}% month --- mes + \fi + \fi + {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis +}% +%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2nd') +\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{% + \afterassignment\print@ordinal + \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil +}% +\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{% + \ifx\relax#1\relax + \ifnum\count@>\z@ + \CardinalNumeric\count@ + \else + ??\sptext{a}% + \fi + \else + \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi + #1#2\relax + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% Spanish ordinal numbers are always obtained by putting +% ``.\textsuperscript{a}'' after the number, at least for editions. +% Therefore, the code here can be significantly simplified. However, +% because I have trouble understanding this code (from the \pkg{amsrefs} +% package) and experimenting did not give the expected results, I won't +% mess with the code too much and stay close to the English code. +% We use the \cmd{\sptext} command from \pkg{babel}'s \fname{spanish.dtx}, +% which formats the ``.\textsuperscript{a}'' slightly differently. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{% + \number#1\relax + \if + \ifnum#1<14 + \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi + \else + F% + \fi + T% + \sptext{a}% + \else + \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax + \ifcase#1\sptext{a}\else \sptext{a}\fi + \fi +}% %% %</spanish> % \end{macrocode} @@ -9238,7 +10986,9 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} % \subsection{\fname{swedish.apc}} % % This file redefines the language-specific elements of \pkg{apacite} -% for the Swedish language. +% for the Swedish language. Translation of APA elements into Swedish +% is not obvious. Ideas of which terms to use have been taken from +% \citeA{Erik01}, \citeA{Johnsson}, and \citeA{GU94}. % % \begin{macrocode} %<*swedish> @@ -9246,57 +10996,21 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} %% swedish.apc - swedish translation of apacite elements %% Written by Stefan Bjork. %% Small adaptations by Erik Meijer -%% $Revision: 1.3 $ %% -%% Translation of APA elements into swedish is not obvious. Ideas of -%% which terms to use have been taken from the following sources: +\makeatletter %% -%% Eriksson, M. G. (2001). Att skriva litteraturreferenser enligt -%% Harvard-systemet. Retreived December 9, 2004, from: -%% http://www.ida.his.se/ida/kurser/exjobb/kursmaterial/referenser.pdf -%% Jonsson, Mattias. (n.d.). Lathund for referensskrivning. Retreived -%% December 9, 2004, from: -%% http://www.ped.gu.se/users/berner/htmarkiv/referens.html -%% Referensskrivning. (1994). Retreived December 9, 2004, from -%% Gothenburg University Web site: -%% http://www.ped.gu.se/forskarutbildning/Referens_skrivning.htm +%% Name of ref. list if it's a section. +\renewcommand{\refname}{Referenser}% +%% Name of ref. list if it's a chapter. +\renewcommand{\bibname}{Litteraturf\"orteckning}% +%% Author Index +\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{F\"orfattarindex}% %% -% -%% Punctuations -\renewcommand{\BBAB}{och}% -% -%% Labels -\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{m.\thinspace{}fl.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{m.\thinspace{}fl.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BIP}{under tryckning}% -\renewcommand{\BIn}{I}% -\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red:er}% -\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"overs.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"overs.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"overs.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordf\"orande}% -\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordf\"orande}% -\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BEd}{upplagan}% -\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BPGS}{ss.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BTR}{teknisk rapport}% -\renewcommand{\BPhD}{diss.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{opublicerad diss.\hbox{}}% -\renewcommand{\BMTh}{examensuppsats}% -\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{opublicerad examensuppsats}% -\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publicerat}% -\renewcommand{\BREPR}{\AA{}terutgivning fr\aa{}n}% +%% A note before the references if a meta-analysis is reported. \renewcommand{\APACmetaprenote}{% Referenser markerade med stj\"arna avser studier inkluderade i - meta-analys.}% -% + metaanalys.}% +%% %% Commands for specific types of @misc entries. \renewcommand{\bibmessage}{meddelande}% \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogram}{datorprogram}% @@ -9304,15 +11018,143 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} \renewcommand{\bibcomputerprogramandmanual}{datorprogram och handbok}% \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftware}{mjukvara}% \renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwaremanual}{handbok till mjukvara}% -\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{datorprogram och handbok}% -\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringsspr\aa{}k}% -% -%% Publication date unknown -\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.\thinspace\aa{}.\hbox{}}% -% -%% Author Index -\renewcommand{\authorindexname}{F\"orfattarindex}% -% +\renewcommand{\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}{mjukvara och handbok}% +\renewcommand{\bibprogramminglanguage}{programmeringsspr{\aa}k}% +%% +%% Other labels +\renewcommand{\bibnodate}{u.~\aa{}.\hbox{}}% ``no date'' +\renewcommand{\BIP}{i tryck}% ``in press'' +\renewcommand{\BOthers}[1]{m.~fl.\hbox{}}% ``and others'' +\renewcommand{\BOthersPeriod}[1]{m.~fl.\hbox{}}% ``and others'', with a period +\renewcommand{\BIn}{I}% for ``In'' editor... +\renewcommand{\Bby}{av}% for ``by'' editor... (in reprints) +\renewcommand{\BED}{red.\hbox{}}% editor +\renewcommand{\BEDS}{red.\hbox{}}% editors +\renewcommand{\BTRANS}{\"overs.\hbox{}}% translator +\renewcommand{\BTRANSS}{\"overs.\hbox{}}% translators +\renewcommand{\BTRANSL}{\"overs.\hbox{}}% translation, for the year field +\renewcommand{\BCHAIR}{ordf\"orande}% chair of symposium +\renewcommand{\BCHAIRS}{ordf\"oranden}% chairs +\renewcommand{\BVOL}{vol.\hbox{}}% volume +\renewcommand{\BVOLS}{vol.\hbox{}}% volumes +\renewcommand{\BNUM}{nr.\hbox{}}% number +\renewcommand{\BNUMS}{nr.\hbox{}}% numbers +\renewcommand{\BEd}{utg{\aa}van}% edition +\renewcommand{\BCHAP}{kap.\hbox{}}% chapter +\renewcommand{\BCHAPS}{kap.\hbox{}}% chapters +\renewcommand{\BPG}{s.\hbox{}}% page +\renewcommand{\BPGS}{s.\hbox{}}% pages +%% Default technical report type name. +\renewcommand{\BTR}{forskningsrapport}% +%% Default PhD thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BPhD}{doktorsavhandling}% +%% Default unpublished PhD thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BUPhD}{opublicerad doktorsavhandling}% +%% Default master's thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BMTh}{examensuppsats}% +%% Default unpublished master's thesis type name. +\renewcommand{\BUMTh}{opublicerad examensuppsats}% +%% +\renewcommand{\BAuthor}{F\"orfattare}% ``Author'' if publisher = author +\renewcommand{\BOWP}{Original publicerat}% Original work published +\renewcommand{\BREPR}{{\AA}terutgivning fr{\aa}n}% Reprinted from +\renewcommand{\BAvailFrom}{Tillg\"anglig fr{\aa}n\ }% Websites; note the space. +%% The argument is the date on which it was last checked. +\renewcommand{\BRetrieved}[1]{H\"amtad {#1}, fr{\aa}n\ }% Websites; note the space. +\renewcommand{\BMsgPostedTo}{Meddelande postat till\ }% Messages; note the space. +%% +%% Punctuation +\renewcommand{\BBOP}{(}% opening parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBCP}{)}% closing parenthesis +\renewcommand{\BBOQ}{}% opening quote for article title +\renewcommand{\BBCQ}{}% closing quote for article title +\renewcommand{\BBAA}{\&}% between authors in parenthetical cites and ref. list +\renewcommand{\BBAB}{och}% between authors in text +\renewcommand{\BAnd}{\&}% for ``Ed. \& Trans.'' in ref. list +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BPBI}{. }% Period between initials +\DeclareRobustCommand{\BHBI}{.-}% Hyphen between initials +\renewcommand{\BAP}{ }% after prefix, before first citation +\renewcommand{\BBAY}{, }% between author(s) and year +\renewcommand{\BBYY}{, }% between years of multiple citations with same author +\renewcommand{\BBC}{; }% between cites +\renewcommand{\BBN}{, }% before note +\renewcommand{\BCBT}{}% no comma between authors in ref. list when no. of + %% authors = 2 +\renewcommand{\BCBL}{}% no comma before last author when no. of authors > 2 +%% +%% Date formatting; adapted from babel's swedish.dtx +\renewcommand{\APACmonth}[1]{\ifcase #1\or + januari\or februari\or mars\or april\or maj\or juni\or + juli\or augusti\or september\or oktober\or november\or + december\or + vinter\or v{\aa}r\or sommar\or h\"ost\else + {#1}\fi}% +%% Numbered version, which is preferred in the form ``(2008, 21/2)''. +\def\APACswedishnumberedmonth#1{\ifcase #1\or + 1\or 2\or 3\or 4\or 5\or 6\or + 7\or 8\or 9\or 10\or 11\or 12\or + vinter\or v{\aa}r\or sommar\or h\"ost\else + {#1}\fi}% +\renewcommand{\APACrefYearMonthDay}[3]{% + {\BBOP}{#1}% year (+ addendum); should not be empty + \ifx\@empty#3\@empty + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + %% Use full month if there is no day. + \unskip, {#2}% month + \fi + \else + \unskip, {#3}% day + \ifx\@empty#2\@empty + \else + %% Use numbered month if there is a day as well. + \let\APACorigmonth\APACmonth + \let\APACmonth\APACswedishnumberedmonth + \unskip{}/{#2}% month + \let\APACmonth\APACorigmonth + \let\APACorigmonth\@undefined + \fi + \fi + {\BBCP}% closing parenthesis +}% +%% Some macros that transform a number (say, `2') to an ordinal one (`2nd') +\renewcommand{\PrintOrdinal}[1]{% + \afterassignment\print@ordinal + \count@ 0#1\relax\@nil +}% +\def\print@ordinal#1#2\@nil{% + \ifx\relax#1\relax + \ifnum\count@>\z@ + \CardinalNumeric\count@ + \else + ??:e% + \fi + \else + \ifnum \count@>\z@ \number\count@ \fi + #1#2\relax + \fi +}% +% \end{macrocode} +% In swedish, ``1st'' = ``1:a'', ``2nd'' = ``2:a'', everything else = +% ``:e''. From 20 onwards, if the last digit is 1 or 2, ``:a'' should +% be used, and otherwise ``:e''. +% \begin{macrocode} +\renewcommand{\CardinalNumeric}[1]{% + \number#1\relax + \if + \ifnum#1<14 + \ifnum#1>\thr@@ T\else F\fi + \else + F% + \fi + T% + :e% + \else + \@xp\keep@last@digit\@xp#1\number#1\relax + \ifcase#1:e\or :a\or :a\or :e\or :e\or :e\or :e\or :e\or :e\or + :e\else :e\fi + \fi +}% %% %</swedish> % \end{macrocode} @@ -9336,43 +11178,43 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} @misc{3.94-1, author = {Walker}, year = {2000}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.95-1, author = {Wasserstein and Zappulla and Rosen and Gerstman and Rock}, year = {1994}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.95-2, author = {Bradley and Ramirez and Soo}, year = {1994}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.95-3, author = {Bradley and Soo and Ramirez and Brown}, year = {1994}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.95-4, author = {Kosslyn and Koenig and Barrett and Cave and Tang and Gabrieli}, year = {1996}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.95-5, author = {Kosslyn and Koenig and Gabrieli and Tang and Marsolek and Daly}, year = {1996}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.95-6, author = {Nightlinger and Littlewood}, year = {1993}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @book{3.95-7, @@ -9381,7 +11223,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {{LISREL} 7: {A} Guide to the Program and Applications}, edition = {2}, address = {Chicago}, - publisher = {SPSS} + publisher = {SPSS}, } @misc{3.96-1, @@ -9389,65 +11231,65 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} firstkey = {{National Institute of Mental Health [NIMH]}}, key = {{NIMH}}, year = {1999}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.96-2, author = {{\bibcorporate{University of Pittsburgh}}}, year = {1993}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @book{3.96-3, author = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}}, firstkey = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond [KNSB]}}, key = {{KNSB}}, - year = {2002}, + year = {2003}, title = {Jaarverslag 2002}, englishtitle = {Annual Report 2002}, address = {Amsterdam}, publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}}, note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with - same key, but with different firstkey.} + same key, but with different firstkey.}, } @book{3.96-4, author = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}}, firstkey = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond [KNSB]}}, key = {{KNSB}}, - year = {2003}, + year = {2004}, title = {Jaarverslag 2003}, englishtitle = {Annual Report 2003}, address = {Amsterdam}, publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaakbond}}}, note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with - same key, but with different firstkey.} + same key, but with different firstkey.}, } @book{3.96-5, author = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}}, firstkey = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond [KNSB]}}, key = {{KNSB}}, - year = {2002}, + year = {2003}, title = {Jaarverslag 2002}, englishtitle = {Annual Report 2002}, address = {Amsterdam}, publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}}, note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with - same key, but with different firstkey.} + same key, but with different firstkey.}, } @book{3.96-6, author = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}}, firstkey = {{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond [KNSB]}}, key = {{KNSB}}, - year = {2003}, + year = {2004}, title = {Jaarverslag 2003}, englishtitle = {Annual Report 2003}, address = {Amsterdam}, publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Koninklijke Nederlandse Schaatsbond}}}, note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references with - same key, but with different firstkey.} + same key, but with different firstkey.}, } @magazine{3.97-1, @@ -9456,20 +11298,20 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} month = apr, title = {Study Finds Free Care Used More}, journal = {{APA} Monitor}, - pages = {14} + pages = {14}, } @book{3.97-2, year = {1979}, title = {College Bound Seniors}, address = {Princeton, NJ}, - publisher = {College Board Publications} + publisher = {College Board Publications}, } @misc{3.97-3, author = {Anonymous}, year = {1998}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @newspaper{3.97-4, @@ -9480,7 +11322,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} journal = {The Edited Newspaper}, pages = {2}, note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references without - author, but with the same title.} + author, but with the same title.}, } @newspaper{3.97-5, @@ -9491,7 +11333,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} journal = {The Edited Newspaper}, pages = {2}, note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references without - author, but with the same title.} + author, but with the same title.}, } @newspaper{3.97-6, @@ -9502,7 +11344,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} journal = {The Edited Newspaper}, pages = {2}, note = {Fake entry to study sorting and citing of references without - author, but with the same title.} + author, but with the same title.}, } @book{3.98-1, @@ -9510,141 +11352,141 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} year = {1959}, title = {Individual Choice Behavior}, address = {New York}, - publisher = {Wiley} + publisher = {Wiley}, } @misc{3.98-2, author = {Luce, P. A.}, year = {1986}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.98-3, author = {Goldberg, J. M. and Neff}, year = {1961}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.98-4, author = {Goldberg, M. E. and Wurtz}, year = {1972}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.99-1, author = {Edeline and Weinberger}, year = {1991}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.99-2, author = {Edeline and Weinberger}, year = {1993}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.99-3, author = {Gogel}, year = {1984}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.99-4, author = {Gogel}, year = {1990}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.99-5, author = {Gogel}, year = {\BIP}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.99-6, author = {Johnson}, year = {1991}, - title = {Aaa} + title = {Aaa}, } @misc{3.99-7, author = {Johnson}, year = {1991}, - title = {Bbb} + title = {Bbb}, } @misc{3.99-8, author = {Johnson}, year = {1991}, - title = {Ccc} + title = {Ccc}, } @misc{3.99-9, author = {Singh}, year = {1983}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.99-10, author = {Singh}, year = {\BIP}, - title = {Aaa} + title = {Aaa}, } @misc{3.99-11, author = {Singh}, year = {\BIP}, - title = {Bbb} + title = {Bbb}, } @misc{3.99-12, author = {Balda}, year = {1980}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.99-13, author = {Kamil}, year = {1988}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.99-14, author = {Pepperberg and Funk}, year = {1990}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.99-15, author = {Minor}, year = {2001}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.99-16, author = {Adams}, year = {1999}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.99-17, author = {Storandt}, year = {1997}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.100-1, author = {Author}, year = {\bibnodate}, type = {Unknown}, - note = {no example, but rule given in text} + note = {no example, but rule given in text}, } @misc{3.100-1b, author = {Author}, year = {2003 version}, type = {Unknown}, - note = {no example, but rule given in text} + note = {no example, but rule given in text}, } @book{3.100-2, @@ -9652,189 +11494,189 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} year = {1931}, title = {Unknown}, translator = {Someone}, - originalyear = {\bibnodate} + originalyear = {\bibnodate}, } @book{3.100-3, author = {James}, year = {1983}, title = {Unknown}, - originalyear = {1890} + originalyear = {1890}, } @misc{3.101-1, author = {Cheek and Buss}, year = {1981}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.101-2, author = {Shimamura}, year = {1989}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.101-3, author = {Myers}, year = {2000}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.101-4, author = {Beutler}, year = {2000}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{3.103-1, author = {Hashtroudi and Chrosniak and Schwartz}, year = {1991}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-t1, author = {Brown, J. R.}, year = {\bibnodate}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-t2, author = {Browning, A. R.}, year = {\bibnodate}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-t3, author = {MacArthur}, year = {\bibnodate}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-t4, author = {McAllister}, year = {\bibnodate}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-t5, author = {MacNeil}, year = {\bibnodate}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-t6, author = {M'Carthy}, year = {\bibnodate}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-t7, author = {DeBase}, year = {\bibnodate}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-t8, author = {De Vries, J.}, year = {\bibnodate}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-t9, author = {von Helmholtz, H. L. F.}, year = {\bibnodate}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @article{4.04-t10, year = {2003}, title = {{\APACSortNoop{Two-Thousand and Three}}2003 Hottest Summer Ever}, journal = {Journal of Meteorology}, - note = {This is a fake entry, used for didactical purposes.} + note = {This is a fake entry, used for didactical purposes.}, } @misc{4.04-1, author = {Hewlett, L. S.}, year = {1996}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-2, author = {Hewlett, L. S.}, year = {1999}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-3, author = {Alleyne, R. L.}, year = {2001}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-4, author = {Alleyne, R. L. and Evans, A. J.}, year = {1999}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-5, author = {Gosling, J. R. and Jerald, K. and Belfar, S. F.}, year = {2000}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-6, author = {Gosling, J. R. and Tevlin, D. F.}, year = {1996}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-7, author = {Hayward, D. and Firsching, A. and Brown, J.}, year = {1999}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-8, author = {Hayward, D. and Firsching, A. and Smigel, J.}, year = {1999}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-9, author = {Cabading, J. R. and Wright, K.}, year = {2000}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-10, author = {Cabading, J. R. and Wright, K.}, year = {2001}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @article{4.04-11, author = {Baheti, J. R.}, year = {2001}, - title = {Control {\ldots}} + title = {Control {\ldots}}, } @article{4.04-12, author = {Baheti, J. R.}, year = {2001}, - title = {Roles of {\ldots}} + title = {Roles of {\ldots}}, } @misc{4.04-13, author = {Mathur, A. L. and Wallston, J.}, year = {1999}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @misc{4.04-14, author = {Mathur, S. E. and Ahlers, R. J.}, year = {1998}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @book{4.05-1, @@ -9842,7 +11684,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} year = {1977}, title = {Social Learning Theory}, address = {Englewood Cliffs, NJ}, - publisher = {Prentice Hall} + publisher = {Prentice Hall}, } @article{4.05-2, @@ -9852,7 +11694,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} 80- to 102-Year-Olds}, journal = {Archives of Sexual Behavior}, volume = {14}, - pages = {343--350} + pages = {343--350}, } @article{4.08-1, @@ -9860,10 +11702,10 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} and Berry, A. and Harlow, T.}, year = {1993}, title = {There's More to Self-Esteem than Whether it is High - or Low: {T}he Importance of Stability of Self-Esteem}, + or Low: The Importance of Stability of Self-Esteem}, journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}, volume = {65}, - pages = {1190--1204} + pages = {1190--1204}, } @book{4.08-2, @@ -9871,24 +11713,24 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} year = {1992}, title = {Social Discourse and Moral Judgment}, address = {San Diego, CA}, - publisher = {Academic Press} + publisher = {Academic Press}, } @misc{4.08-3, author = {Bulatao, E. {\protect\bibliteral{(with Winford, C.~A.)}\protect\indexskipbracenodot}}, year = {\bibnodate}, - type = {Unknown} + type = {Unknown}, } @article{4.09-1, author = {Fowers, B. J. and Olson, D. H.}, year = {1993}, title = {{ENRICH} {Marital} {Satisfaction} {Scale}: - {A} Brief Research and Clinical Tool}, + A Brief Research and Clinical Tool}, journal = {Journal of Family Psychology}, volume = {7}, - pages = {176--185} + pages = {176--185}, } @article{4.10-1, @@ -9898,7 +11740,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} in Childcare and Housework}, journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}, volume = {65}, - pages = {1154--1166} + pages = {1154--1166}, } @incollection{4.10-2, @@ -9910,7 +11752,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} booktitle = {Gender Issues Across the Life Cycle}, pages = {107--123}, address = {New York}, - publisher = {Springer} + publisher = {Springer}, } @article{4.11-1, @@ -9920,7 +11762,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} on Human Mating}, journal = {Psychological Review}, volume = {100}, - pages = {204--232} + pages = {204--232}, } @magazine{4.11-2, @@ -9931,7 +11773,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Beyond the Melting Pot}, journal = {Time}, volume = {135}, - pages = {28--31} + pages = {28--31}, } @book{4.12-1, @@ -9940,7 +11782,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Cultural and Cognitive Development: Studies in Mathematical Understanding}, address = {Hillsdale, NJ}, - publisher = {Erlbaum} + publisher = {Erlbaum}, } @incollection{4.13-1, @@ -9951,7 +11793,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} booktitle = {Culture, Ethnicity, and Mental Illness}, pages = {517--552}, address = {Washington, DC}, - publisher = {American Psychiatric Press} + publisher = {American Psychiatric Press}, } @incollection{4.13-2, @@ -9970,7 +11812,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} volume = {7}, pages = {497--499}, address = {New York}, - publisher = {Oxford University Press} + publisher = {Oxford University Press}, } @misc{4.15-1, @@ -9981,7 +11823,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} month = oct, day = {12}, lastchecked = {October 23, 2000}, - URL = {http://www.apa.org/journals/webref.html} + URL = {http://www.apa.org/journals/webref.html}, } @article{4.15-2, @@ -9993,7 +11835,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} journal = {Psychological Methods}, volume = {4}, pages = {100--116}, - howpublished = {Retrieved November 19, 2000, from the PsycARTICLES database} + howpublished = {Retrieved November 19, 2000, from the PsycARTICLES database}, } % @@ -10010,7 +11852,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} of Semantic Relations and Syntactic Information}, journal = {Journal of Experimental Psychology: General}, volume = {122}, - pages = {184--194} + pages = {184--194}, } @article{ex1, @@ -10019,7 +11861,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Choice and the Relative Pleasure of Consequences}, journal = {Psychological Bulletin}, volume = {126}, - pages = {910--924} + pages = {910--924}, } @article{ex2, @@ -10029,7 +11871,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} journal = {Consulting Psychology Journal: Practice and Research}, volume = {45}, number = {2}, - pages = {10--36} + pages = {10--36}, } @article{ex3, @@ -10039,7 +11881,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Treatment for Sexually Abused Children and Adolescents}, journal = {American Psychologist}, volume = {55}, - pages = {1040--1049} + pages = {1040--1049}, } @article{ex4, @@ -10050,7 +11892,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} Mother-Child Programs for Children of Divorce}, journal = {Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology}, volume = {68}, - pages = {843--856} + pages = {843--856}, } @article{ex4-2, @@ -10062,7 +11904,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} in Disaggregate Choice Analysis}, journal = {Marketing Letters}, volume = {13}, - pages = {195--205} + pages = {195--205}, } @article{ex5, @@ -10070,7 +11912,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} year = {\BIP}, title = {Race Differences in Face-ism: {D}oes Facial Prominence Imply Dominance?}, - journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology} + journal = {Journal of Personality and Social Psychology}, } @magazine{ex6, @@ -10082,7 +11924,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} Study of Brain and Mind}, journal = {Science}, volume = {290}, - pages = {1113--1120} + pages = {1113--1120}, } @article{ex7, @@ -10093,7 +11935,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} Diversity in Clinical Psychology Education}, journal = {The Clinical Psychologist}, volume = {46}, - pages = {83--87} + pages = {83--87}, } @article{ex8, @@ -10102,7 +11944,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {The New Health-Care Lexicon}, journal = {Copy Editor}, volume = {4}, - pages = {1--2} + pages = {1--2}, } @newspaper{ex9, @@ -10113,7 +11955,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {New Drug Appears to Sharply Cut Risk of Death from Heart Failure}, journal = {The Washington Post}, - pages = {A12} + pages = {A12}, } @newspaper{ex10, @@ -10123,7 +11965,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} day = {30}, title = {Obesity Affects Economic, Social Status}, journal = {The Washington Post}, - pages = {A1, A4} + pages = {A1, A4}, } @newspaper{ex11, @@ -10134,7 +11976,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {How to Tackle the Problem of Student Drinking}, type = {Letter to the editor}, journal = {The Chronicle of Higher Education}, - pages = {B20} + pages = {B20}, } @article{ex12, @@ -10145,7 +11987,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} type = {Special issue}, journal = {Journal of Abnormal Psychology}, volume = {100}, - number = {3} + number = {3}, } @article{ex13, @@ -10165,7 +12007,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} Category Norms}, journal = {Journal of Experimental Psychology Monographs}, volume = {80}, - number = {3, Pt.~2} + number = {3, Pt.~2}, } @article{ex15, @@ -10177,7 +12019,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} type = {Monograph}, journal = {Journal of Applied Psychology}, volume = {76}, - pages = {143--168} + pages = {143--168}, } @article{ex16, @@ -10190,7 +12032,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} type = {Abstract}, journal = {Society for Neuroscience Abstracts}, volume = {17}, - pages = {480} + pages = {480}, } @article{ex17, @@ -10203,7 +12045,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} pages = {9--16}, howpublished = {Abstract obtained from {\APACcitebtitle{PsycSCAN: Neuropsychology}}, - 1993, \emph{2}, Abstract No.~604} + 1993, \emph{2}, Abstract No.~604}, } @article{ex18, @@ -10214,7 +12056,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} journal = {Journal of Psychiatric Research}, volume = {24}, number = {Suppl.~2}, - pages = {3--14} + pages = {3--14}, } @article{ex19, @@ -10223,7 +12065,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Social Cognition and Social Perception}, journal = {Annual Review of Psychology}, volume = {44}, - pages = {155--194} + pages = {155--194}, } @article{ex20, @@ -10237,7 +12079,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} journal = {Zeitschrift f{\"{u}}r Differentielle und Diagnostische Psychologie}, volume = {21}, - pages = {208--217} + pages = {208--217}, } @article{ex21, @@ -10247,7 +12089,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} journal = {Acta Paedopsychiatrica}, volume = {38}, number = {9}, - pages = {229--231} + pages = {229--231}, } @article{ex22, @@ -10257,7 +12099,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} Parallel-Distributed-Processing Approaches}, journal = {Psychological Review}, volume = {100}, - pages = {589--608} + pages = {589--608}, } @book{B-1, @@ -10265,7 +12107,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} year = {2001}, title = {Family Mediation: Facts, Myths, and Future Prospects}, address = {Washington, DC}, - publisher = {American Psychological Association} + publisher = {American Psychological Association}, } @book{ex23, @@ -10275,7 +12117,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} Organizational Behavior}, edition = {3}, address = {New York}, - publisher = {McGraw-Hill} + publisher = {McGraw-Hill}, } @book{ex24, @@ -10286,7 +12128,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} {June} 1990}, number = {3209.1}, address = {Canberra, Australian Capital Territory}, - publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Australian Bureau of Statistics}}} + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Australian Bureau of Statistics}}}, } @book{ex25, @@ -10295,7 +12137,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Children of Color: Psychological Interventions with Minority Youth}, address = {San Francisco}, - publisher = {Jossey-Bass} + publisher = {Jossey-Bass}, } @book{ex25-t1, @@ -10307,7 +12149,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} translator = {Rice, Edgar}, address = {Cambridge, MA}, publisher = {Harvard University Press}, - originalyear = {1930, 1933, 1935} + originalyear = {1930, 1933, 1935}, } @book{ex25-t2, @@ -10317,7 +12159,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} and Structural Equation Models}, editor = {Magidson, Jay}, address = {Cambridge, MA}, - publisher = {Abt Books} + publisher = {Abt Books}, } @book{ex26, @@ -10325,7 +12167,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Merriam-{Webster}'s Collegiate Dictionary}, edition = {10}, address = {Springfield, MA}, - publisher = {Merriam-Webster} + publisher = {Merriam-Webster}, } @book{ex27, @@ -10334,7 +12176,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Meta-Analytic Procedures for Social Research}, edition = {Rev.\hbox{}}, address = {Newbury Park, CA}, - publisher = {Sage} + publisher = {Sage}, } @book{ex28, @@ -10343,7 +12185,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Psychology: {A} Study of Science}, volume = {1--6}, address = {New York}, - publisher = {McGraw-Hill} + publisher = {McGraw-Hill}, } @book{ex29, @@ -10355,7 +12197,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders}, edition = {4}, address = {Washington, DC}, - publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychiatric Association}}} + publisher = {{\bibcorporate{American Psychiatric Association}}}, } @book{ex30, @@ -10365,7 +12207,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} edition = {6}, volume = {1--20}, address = {London}, - publisher = {Macmillan} + publisher = {Macmillan}, } @book{ex30-2, @@ -10380,7 +12222,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} year = {2000}, title = {Encyclopedia of Psychology}, address = {New York}, - publisher = {Oxford University Press} + publisher = {Oxford University Press}, } @book{ex31, @@ -10389,7 +12231,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {La Gen{\`{e}}se de l'Id{\'{e}}e de Hasard chez l'Enfant}, englishtitle = {The Origin of the Idea of Chance in the Child}, address = {Paris}, - publisher = {Presses Universitaires de France} + publisher = {Presses Universitaires de France}, } @book{ex32, @@ -10399,7 +12241,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} translator = {Truscott, F. W. and Emory, F. L.}, address = {New York}, publisher = {Dover}, - originalyear = {1814} + originalyear = {1814}, } @book{ex33, @@ -10414,7 +12256,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} type = {Brochure}, address = {Lawrence, KS}, publisher = {{\bibcorporate{Research and Training Center on - Independent Living}}} + Independent Living}}}, } @incollection{B-2, @@ -10425,7 +12267,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} booktitle = {Cognition: Conceptual and Methodological Issues}, pages = {51--84}, address = {Washington, DC}, - publisher = {American Psychological Association} + publisher = {American Psychological Association}, } @incollection{ex34, @@ -10436,7 +12278,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} booktitle = {Varieties of Memory \& Consciousness}, pages = {309--330}, address = {Hillsdale, NJ}, - publisher = {Erlbaum} + publisher = {Erlbaum}, } @incollection{ex35, @@ -10448,7 +12290,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} booktitle = {Empirical Studies of Psychoanalytic Theories: {Vol}.~4. {Psychoanalytic} Perspectives on Psychopathology}, address = {Washington, DC}, - publisher = {American Psychological Association} + publisher = {American Psychological Association}, } @incollection{ex36, @@ -10463,7 +12305,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} edition = {4}, pages = {1--101}, address = {New York}, - publisher = {Wiley} + publisher = {Wiley}, } @incollection{ex37, @@ -10477,7 +12319,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} booktitle = {Sovjetpsychologen aan het Woord}, pages = {227--289}, address = {Groningen, The Netherlands}, - publisher = {Wolters-Noordhoff} + publisher = {Wolters-Noordhoff}, } @incollection{ex38, @@ -10488,7 +12330,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} volume = {26}, pages = {501--508}, address = {Chicago}, - publisher = {Encyclopaedia Britannica} + publisher = {Encyclopaedia Britannica}, } @incollection{ex39, @@ -10503,7 +12345,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} pages = {3--66}, address = {London}, publisher = {Hogarth Press}, - originalyear = {1923} + originalyear = {1923}, } @incollection{ex40, @@ -10521,7 +12363,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} originaleditor = {Mussen, P. H.}, originalyear = {1970}, originaladdress = {New York}, - originalpublisher = {Wiley} + originalpublisher = {Wiley}, } @incollection{ex40-t1, @@ -10550,7 +12392,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} type = {College Board Rep.}, number = {91-5}, address = {Princeton, NJ}, - institution = {Educational Testing Service} + institution = {Educational Testing Service}, } @techreport{ex41, @@ -10562,7 +12404,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} type = {{DHHS} Publication}, number = {ADM 90-1679}, address = {Washington, DC}, - institution = {U.S. Government Printing Office} + institution = {U.S. Government Printing Office}, } @techreport{ex42, @@ -10572,7 +12414,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} type = {\bibnotype}, address = {Lincoln}, institution = {University of Nebraska}, - note = {NTIS No.\hbox{} PB~91-154~377/AS} + note = {NTIS No.\hbox{} PB~91-154~377/AS}, } @techreport{ex43, @@ -10584,7 +12426,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} number = {NCRTL-RR-92-4}, address = {East Lansing, MI}, institution = {National Center for Research on Teacher Learning}, - note = {ERIC Document Reproduction Service No.\hbox{} ED346082} + note = {ERIC Document Reproduction Service No.\hbox{} ED346082}, } @techreport{ex44, @@ -10598,7 +12440,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} number = {92-0047}, address = {Rockville, MD}, institution = {{\bibcorporate{U.S. Department of Health and - Human Services}}} + Human Services}}}, } @intechreport{ex45, @@ -10613,7 +12455,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} number = {85-2270}, pages = {153--183}, address = {Washington, DC}, - institution = {U.S. Department of Health and Human Services} + institution = {U.S. Department of Health and Human Services}, } @techreport{ex46, @@ -10622,7 +12464,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Sex Offending and Recidivism}, number = {3}, address = {Nedlands}, - institution = {University of Western Australia, Crime Research Centre} + institution = {University of Western Australia, Crime Research Centre}, } @techreport{ex47, @@ -10633,7 +12475,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} type = {Delta Research Monograph}, number = {11}, address = {Palmerston North, New Zealand}, - institution = {Massey University, Department of Education} + institution = {Massey University, Department of Education}, } @techreport{ex48, @@ -10647,7 +12489,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} type = {Issue Brief}, number = {123}, address = {Washington, DC}, - institution = {{\bibcorporate{Employee Benefit Research Institute}}} + institution = {{\bibcorporate{Employee Benefit Research Institute}}}, } @incollection{ex49, @@ -10660,7 +12502,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} {Perspectives} on Motivation}, pages = {237--288}, address = {Lincoln}, - publisher = {University of Nebraska Press} + publisher = {University of Nebraska Press}, } @article{ex50, @@ -10669,7 +12511,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Hemispheric Differences in Avian Song Discrimination}, journal = {Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, USA}, volume = {89}, - pages = {1372--1375} + pages = {1372--1375}, } @lecture{ex51, @@ -10683,7 +12525,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} symposium = {Reducing Medication in Geriatric Populations}, howpublished = {Symposium conducted at the meeting of the First International Congress of Behavioral Medicine}, - address = {Uppsala, Sweden} + address = {Uppsala, Sweden}, } @lecture{ex52, @@ -10694,7 +12536,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} for {Children} ({TSC-C})}, howpublished = {Paper presented at the meeting of the American Professional Society on the Abuse of Children}, - address = {San Diego, CA} + address = {San Diego, CA}, } @lecture{ex53, @@ -10704,7 +12546,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Beyond Redlining: Editing Software that Works}, howpublished = {Poster session presented at the annual meeting of the Society for Scholarly Publishing}, - address = {Washington, DC} + address = {Washington, DC}, } @phdthesis{ex54, @@ -10717,7 +12559,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} volume = {54}, number = {01}, pages = {534B}, - note = {UMI No.~9315947} + note = {UMI No.~9315947}, } @phdthesis{ex55, @@ -10730,7 +12572,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} originalyear = {1990}, journal = {Dissertation Abstracts International}, volume = {51}, - pages = {417} + pages = {417}, } @phdthesis{ex56, @@ -10739,7 +12581,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Interpersonal Analyses of Bulimia: Normalweight and Obese}, school = {University of Missouri}, - address = {Columbia} + address = {Columbia}, } @mastersthesis{ex57, @@ -10748,7 +12590,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Fathers' Participation in Family Work: Consequences for Fathers' Stress and Father--Child Relations}, school = {University of Victoria}, - address = {Victoria, British Columbia, Canada} + address = {Victoria, British Columbia, Canada}, } @unpublished{ex58, @@ -10756,7 +12598,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} year = {1992}, title = {Thematic Segmentation of Psychotherapy Transcripts for Convergent Analyses}, - howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript} + howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript}, } @unpublished{ex59, @@ -10765,7 +12607,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Perceiving the Powerful: Intriguing Individuals Versus Threatening Groups}, howpublished = {Unpublished manuscript}, - organization = {University of Massachusetts at Amherst} + organization = {University of Massachusetts at Amherst}, } @unpublished{ex60, @@ -10773,14 +12615,14 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} year = {1993}, title = {Religion as Schema, with Implications for the Relation Between Religion and Coping}, - howpublished = {Manuscript submitted for publication} + howpublished = {Manuscript submitted for publication}, } @unpublished{ex61, author = {Bordi, F. and LeDoux, J. E.}, year = {1993}, type = {Auditory response latencies in rat auditory cortex}, - howpublished = {Unpublished raw data} + howpublished = {Unpublished raw data}, } @misc{ex62, @@ -10790,7 +12632,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {{ADAA} {Reporter}}, note = {Available from the Anxiety Disorders Association of America, 6000 Executive Boulevard, Suite 513, - Rockville, MD 20852} + Rockville, MD 20852}, } @article{G-1, @@ -10801,7 +12643,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} Psychological and social development in middle age}}}, journal = {Contemporary Psychology: APA Review of Books}, volume = {45}, - pages = {482--485} + pages = {482--485}, } @article{ex63, @@ -10812,7 +12654,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} {\APACcitebtitle{The social life of information}}}, journal = {Science}, volume = {290}, - pages = {1304} + pages = {1304}, } @article{ex64, @@ -10823,7 +12665,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} {\APACcitebtitle{Discovering Psychology}}}, journal = {Contemporary Psychology}, volume = {37}, - pages = {1146--1147} + pages = {1146--1147}, } @misc{ex65-1, @@ -10834,7 +12676,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {You Can Count On Me}, type = {Motion picture}, address = {United States}, - publisher = {Paramount Pictures} + publisher = {Paramount Pictures}, } @misc{ex65-2, @@ -10845,7 +12687,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Changing Our Minds: The Story of {Evelyn} {Hooker}}, type = {Motion picture}, note = {Available from Changing Our Minds, Inc., 170 West End - Avenue, Suite 25R, New York, NY 10023} + Avenue, Suite 25R, New York, NY 10023}, } @misc{ex65-3, @@ -10857,7 +12699,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} Sexual Attraction: A Stimulus Training Tape}, type = {Motion picture}, note = {Available from the American Psychological Association, - 750 First Street, NE, Washington, DC 20002-4242} + 750 First Street, NE, Washington, DC 20002-4242}, } @misc{ex66, @@ -10869,7 +12711,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {The {MacNeil}/{Lehrer} News Hour}, type = {Television broadcast}, address = {New York and Washington, DC}, - publisher = {Public Broadcasting Service} + publisher = {Public Broadcasting Service}, } @misc{ex67, @@ -10878,7 +12720,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {The Mind}, type = {Television series}, address = {New York}, - publisher = {WNET} + publisher = {WNET}, } @incollection{ex68, @@ -10891,7 +12733,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} editor = {Sander{\bibeditortype{Producer}}, J.}, booktitle = {I'll Fly Away}, address = {New York}, - publisher = {New York Broadcasting Company} + publisher = {New York Broadcasting Company}, } @incollection{ex69-1, @@ -10902,7 +12744,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Over the Waterfall{\bibInstring{\BOn}}}, booktitle = {Arkansas Traveler {\upshape[\uppercase{CD}]}}, address = {New York}, - publisher = {PolyGram Music} + publisher = {PolyGram Music}, } @incollection{ex69-2, @@ -10915,7 +12757,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} booktitle = {And So Will We Yet {\upshape[\uppercase{CD}]}}, address = {Sharon, CT}, publisher = {Folk-Legacy Records}, - note = {1990} + note = {1990}, } @misc{ex70, @@ -10925,7 +12767,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} type = {Cassette Recording}, number = {207-433-88A-B}, address = {Washington, DC}, - publisher = {American Psychological Association} + publisher = {American Psychological Association}, } @article{ex71-1, @@ -10936,7 +12778,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} type = {Electronic version}, journal = {Journal of Bibliographic Research}, volume = {5}, - pages = {117--123} + pages = {117--123}, } @article{ex71-2, @@ -10948,7 +12790,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} volume = {5}, pages = {117--123}, lastchecked = {October 13, 2001}, - url = {http://jbr.org/articles.html} + url = {http://jbr.org/articles.html}, } @article{ex72, @@ -10962,7 +12804,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} volume = {3}, pages = {Article 0001a}, lastchecked = {November 20, 2000}, - url = {http://journals.apa.org/prevention/volume3/pre0030001a.html} + url = {http://journals.apa.org/prevention/volume3/pre0030001a.html}, } @article{ex73, @@ -10975,7 +12817,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} lastchecked = {March 25, 2001}, url = {ftp://ftp.princeton.edu/harnad/Psycoloquy/ 2000.volume.11/psyc.00.11.001. - language-sex-chromosomes.1.crow} + language-sex-chromosomes.1.crow}, } @article{ex74, @@ -10989,7 +12831,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} volume = {2}, number = {2}, lastchecked = {June 6, 2000}, - url = {http://www.telehealth.net/subscribe/newslettr_4a.html#1} + url = {http://www.telehealth.net/subscribe/newslettr_4a.html#1}, } @misc{ex75, @@ -11002,7 +12844,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} year = {\bibnodate}, title = {Who Has Time for a Family Meal? {You} Do!}, lastchecked = {October 5, 2000}, - url = {http://www.familymealtime.org} + url = {http://www.familymealtime.org}, } @incollection{ex76, @@ -11022,7 +12864,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} year = {\bibnodate}, title = {{GVU}'s 8th {WWW} User Survey}, lastchecked = {August 8, 2000}, - url = {http://www.cc.gatech.edu/gvu/user_surveys/survey-1997-10/} + url = {http://www.cc.gatech.edu/gvu/user_surveys/survey-1997-10/}, } @misc{ex78, @@ -11033,7 +12875,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} howpublished = {Retrieved August 24, 2000, from Columbia University, Institute for Learning Technologies Web site: \url{http://www.ilt.columbia.edu/ - publications/papers/newwine1.html}\bibnodot{.}} + publications/papers/newwine1.html}\bibnodot{.}}, } @misc{ex79, @@ -11047,7 +12889,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Chronic Care in {A}merica: {A} 21st Century Challenge}, howpublished = {Retrieved September 9, 2000, from the Robert Wood Johnson Foundation Web site: - \url{http://www.rwjf.org/library/chrcare/}\bibnodot{.}} + \url{http://www.rwjf.org/library/chrcare/}\bibnodot{.}}, } @misc{ex80, @@ -11058,7 +12900,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {{\APACSortNoop{Nineteen Ninety-Seven}}1997 Sourcebook of Federal Sentencing Statistics}, lastchecked = {December 8, 1999}, - url = {http://www.ussc.gov/annrpt/1997/sbtoc97.htm} + url = {http://www.ussc.gov/annrpt/1997/sbtoc97.htm}, } @misc{ex81, @@ -11070,7 +12912,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} and Future Steps}, lastchecked = {November 8, 2000}, url = {http://www.canarie.ca/press/publications/pdf/ - health/healthvision.doc} + health/healthvision.doc}, } @techreport{ex82, @@ -11125,7 +12967,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {News Resources for Visual Cognition}, type = {\bibmessage}, number = {31}, - url = {http://groups.yahoo.com/group/visualcognition/message/31} + url = {http://groups.yahoo.com/group/visualcognition/message/31}, } @misc{ex87, @@ -11137,7 +12979,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} type = {\bibmessage}, howpublished = {Message posted to Ref-Links electronic mailing list, archived at \url{http://www.doi.org/mail-archive/ - ref-link/msg00088.html}\bibnodot{.}} + ref-link/msg00088.html}\bibnodot{.}}, } @article{ex88, @@ -11148,7 +12990,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} journal = {Journal of Applied Psychology}, volume = {78}, pages = {443--449}, - howpublished = {Retrieved October 23, 2000, from the PsycARTICLES database} + howpublished = {Retrieved October 23, 2000, from the PsycARTICLES database}, } @newspaper{ex89, @@ -11159,7 +13001,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {In Forecasting Their Emotions, Most People Flunk Out}, journal = {New York Times}, lastchecked = {November 21, 2000}, - url = {http://www.nytimes.com} + url = {http://www.nytimes.com}, } @article{ex90, @@ -11170,7 +13012,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} journal = {Journal of Behavioral Medicine}, volume = {22}, pages = {303--326}, - howpublished = {Abstract retrieved October 23, 2000, from PsycINFO database} + howpublished = {Abstract retrieved October 23, 2000, from PsycINFO database}, } @techreport{ex91, @@ -11183,7 +13025,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} howpublished = {Retrieved September 15, 2000, from General Accounting Office Reports Online via GPO Access: \url{http://www.access.gpo.gov/su_docs/aces/ - aces160.shtml?/gao/index.html}\bibnodot{.}} + aces160.shtml?/gao/index.html}\bibnodot{.}}, } @misc{ex92, @@ -11193,7 +13035,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} edition = {Version~4.0\noedition\ignorespaces}, type = {\bibcomputersoftware}, address = {Westminster, CA}, - publisher = {Psytek Services} + publisher = {Psytek Services}, } @misc{ex93, @@ -11202,7 +13044,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {Statistics Software for Meta-Analysis}, type = {\bibcomputersoftwareandmanual}, lastchecked = {March 23, 2001}, - url = {http://www.yorku.ca/faculty/academic/schwarze/meta_e.htm} + url = {http://www.yorku.ca/faculty/academic/schwarze/meta_e.htm}, } @manual{ex93-t1, @@ -11211,7 +13053,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} title = {R: A Language and Environment for Statistical Computing}, address = {Vienna, Austria}, publisher = {R Foundation for Statistical Computing}, - url = {http://www.r-project.org} + url = {http://www.r-project.org}, } @misc{ex94, @@ -11222,7 +13064,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} type = {Data file}, year = {\bibnodate}, address = {Hyattsville, MD}, - publisher = {National Center for Health Statistics} + publisher = {National Center for Health Statistics}, } @misc{ex95, @@ -11236,7 +13078,7 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} Agencies and Hospices, 1991}, type = {Data file}, howpublished = {Available from National Technical Information Service - Web site, \url{http://www.ntis.gov}\bibnodot{.}} + Web site, \url{http://www.ntis.gov}\bibnodot{.}}, } % @@ -11276,6 +13118,15 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} publisher = {The University of Chicago Press}, } +@misc{Pata88, + author = {Patashnik, Oren}, + year = {1988}, + title = {{\BibTeX ing}}, + url = {http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/ + bibtex/distribs/doc/btxdoc.tex}, + lastchecked = {October 4, 2008}, +} + @book{LaTeXbook, author = {Lamport, Leslie}, year = {1994}, @@ -11312,6 +13163,18 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} publisher = {DSWO Press}, } +@article{meijer07, + author = {Meijer, Erik}, + year = {2007}, + title = {Citations, Reference List, and Author Index with + \textsf{apacite}}, + journal = {Eutypon}, + volume = {16--19}, + pages = {1--31}, + url = {http://www.eutypon.gr/eutypon/e-cont-16-19.html}, + lastchecked = {October~4, 2008}, +} + @book{WaMe00, author = {Wansbeek, Tom and Meijer, Erik}, year = {2000}, @@ -11331,9 +13194,161 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} address = {Baltimore}, } +@misc{DePsych01, + key = {{\APACciteatitle{Uitgebreide Richtlijnen}}}, + title = {Uitgebreide Richtlijnen voor het Aanleveren van Kopij}, + englishtitle = {Detailed Guidelines for the Submission of Manuscripts}, + year = {2001}, + lastchecked = {January~3, 2005}, + url = {http://upload.lectric.nl/data/nip7/Richtlijnen%20voor%20auteurs.pdf}, +} + +@article{NTPG04, + title = {Aanwijzingen voor Auteurs}, + englishtitle = {Instructions for Authors}, + year = {2004}, + journal = {Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar + Grensgebieden}, + volume = {59}, + pages = {inside back cover}, +} + +@book{Renk02, + author = {Renkema, J.}, + year = {2002}, + title = {Schrijfwijzer}, + englishtitle = {Writing Indicator}, + edition = {4}, + address = {Den Haag, The Netherlands}, + publisher = {Sdu}, +} + +@article{Schr04, + author = {Schrooten, M. G. S. and Smulders, F. T. Y.}, + year = {2004}, + title = {Een Experimentele Kijk op Angst: Aandacht en Automatisme + in de Verwerking van Bedreigende Stimuli}, + englishtitle = {Anxiety from an Experimental Point of View: Attention and + Automaticity in the Processing of Threatening Stimuli}, + journal = {Nederlands Tijdschrift voor de Psychologie en haar + Grensgebieden}, + volume = {59}, + pages = {135--149}, +} + +@book{VanDale89, + key = {{\APACcitebtitle{van Dale}}}, + title = {van {Dale} Groot Woordenboek {Engels}-{Nederlands}}, + englishtitle = {van {Dale}'s Large Dictionary {English}-{Dutch}}, + edition = {2}, + year = {1989}, + address = {Utrecht, The Netherlands}, + publisher = {Van Dale}, +} + +@book{KLO05, + author = {Haapam\"aki, Tuula and Hedman, Arne + and H\"am\"al\"ainen, Esa and Kurvinen, Birgitta + and Lager, Lassi and Lindegren, Yrj\"o + and Murtomaa, Eeva and Vainikka, Eila}, + year = {2005}, + title = {Monografioiden kuvailu}, + englishtitle = {Description for Monographic Publications}, + address = {Helsinki, Finland}, + publisher = {Helsingin yliopiston kirjasto}, + url = {http://www.kansalliskirjasto.fi/kirjastoala/ + luettelointisaannot/Files/liitetiedosto2/ + monografioiden_kuvailu.pdf}, + lastchecked = {January 19, 2009}, +} + +@book{DGPs07, + firstkey = {Deutsche Gesellschaft f\"ur Psychologie [DGPs]}, + key = {DGPs}, + author = {\bibcorporate{Deutsche Gesellschaft f\"ur Psychologie}}, + year = {2007}, + title = {Richtlinien zur {Manuskriptgestaltung}}, + englishtitle = {Guidelines for Manuscript Preparation}, + edition = {3}, + address = {G\"ottingen, Germany}, + publisher = {Hogrefe-Verlag}, +} + +@misc{UIB08, + author = {{\bibcorporate{University of Bergen}}}, + year = {2008}, + title = {American {Psychological} {Association} ({APA})}, + url = {http://www.sokogskriv.no/norsk/basis/sitering-etikk/APA.pdf}, + lastchecked = {October 12, 2008}, + address = {Bergen, Norway}, + publisher = {University of Bergen, University Library}, +} +%% Referenced from +%% \url{http://www.sokogskriv.no/norsk/basis/sitering-etikk/4-stiler.html} +%% +%% Original version: +%% \url{http://www.ub.uib.no/felles/IK/APA.pdf} +%% but this page does not exist anymore on 2008/10/12. +%% +%% Norwegian name: +%% Universitetsbiblioteket, Universitetet I Bergen, 2008 + +@misc{UiO06, + author = {{\bibcorporate{University of Oslo}}}, + year = {2006}, + title = {Normer for skriftlig arbeid}, + englishtitle = {Standards for Written Works}, + url = {http://www.uio.no/studier/emner/medisin/isv/SYKVIT4400/v07/ + REV_normer_skriftl_arb.pdf}, + lastchecked = {October 12, 2008}, + address = {Oslo, Norway}, + publisher = {University of Oslo, Institute of Nursing and Health Sciences}, +} +%% Referenced from +%% \url{http://www.uio.no/studier/emner/medisin/isv/SYKVIT4400/v07/} +%% +%% Norwegian name: +%% Universitetet i Oslo, Sykepleievitenskap, 28.06.06 + + +@misc{Erik01, + author = {Erikson, Martin G.}, + year = {2001}, + title = {Att Skriva Litteraturreferenser Enligt {Harvard}-Systemet}, + englishtitle = {Citations According to the {Harvard} System}, + url = {http://www.his.se/upload/10631/referenser.pdf}, + lastchecked = {October 18, 2008}, + Eriksremark = {Originally downloaded December 9, 2004, from + \url{http://www.ida.his.se/ida/kurser/exjobb/kursmaterial/referenser.pdf}, + but this site does not exist anymore.}, +} + +@misc{Johnsson, + author = {Johnsson, Mattias}, + title = {Lathund for Referensskrivning}, + englishtitle = {Cheat Sheet for Formatting of References}, + url = {http://www.ped.gu.se/users/berner/htmarkiv/referens.html}, + lastchecked = {October 18, 2008}, + Eriksremark = {Originally downloaded December 9, 2004}, +} + +@misc{GU94, + title = {Referensskrivning}, + englishtitle = {Formatting of References}, + year = {1994}, + url = {http://www.ped.gu.se/forskarutbildning/Referens_skrivning.htm}, + lastchecked = {October 18, 2008}, + Eriksremark = {Originally downloaded December 9, 2004. + Site is Gothenburg University Web site, but reference seems + specific enough. Authors may be (?) + Informatorn/Dahlgren/Ottosson, but I don't know first + names.}, +} + %% %</bibdb> % \end{macrocode} +% % \section{\BibTeX\ style (\fname{apacite.bst}, \fname{apacitex.bst})} % The program in \BibTeX's language that formats the reference list. % These two files are almost identical, but \fname{apacitex.bst} @@ -11341,19 +13356,37 @@ Referanser merket med en stjerne viser til studier som er med i metaanalysen.} % as well. % % \begin{macrocode} +%<*!annotated> %<bibstyle>%% apacite.bst : reference list according to APA manual %<xbibstyle>%% apacitex.bst : reference list according to APA manual %<xbibstyle>%% with author indexing information +%</!annotated> +%<*annotated> +%<bibstyle>%% apacann.bst : reference list according to APA manual +%<bibstyle>%% with annotations +%<xbibstyle>%% apacannx.bst : reference list according to APA manual +%<xbibstyle>%% with annotations and author indexing information +%</annotated> %<*bibstyle|xbibstyle> %% Written by Erik Meijer FUNCTION {identify.apacite.version} { % Put identifying string in the .blg file %</bibstyle|xbibstyle> +%<*!annotated> %<bibstyle> "apacite.bst" %<xbibstyle> "apacitex.bst" -%<bibstyle> " [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibliography style]" -%<xbibstyle> " [2007/09/03 v4.00 APA bibl. style with author index info]" +%<bibstyle> " [2009/03/01 v4.05 APA bibliography style]" +%<xbibstyle> " [2009/03/01 v4.05 APA bibl. style with author index info]" +%</!annotated> +%<*annotated> +%<bibstyle> "apacann.bst" +%<xbibstyle> "apacannx.bst" +%<bibstyle> " [2009/03/01 v4.05 APA annotated bibliography style]" +%<*xbibstyle> +" [2009/03/01 v4.05 APA annotated bibl. style with author index info]" +%</xbibstyle> +%</annotated> %<*bibstyle|xbibstyle> * top$ } @@ -11365,7 +13398,8 @@ FUNCTION {identify.apacite.version} ENTRY { address - annote % not used + annote % only used for annotated version + annotate % only used for annotated version author booktitle % for articles in books chair % for lectures @@ -12123,6 +14157,32 @@ FUNCTION {fin.entry} { "\vspace{\baselineskip}" write$ newline$ } 'skip$ if$ +%<*annotated> + % + % According to TLC2, pp. 810-811, both annote and annotate fields are + % known, so support them both, but do not print them both, in case + % someone wants to make a file that is compatible with both the annotate + % and annotation styles and thus duplicates the information. Instead, we + % give annote priority. + % + annote empty$ + {% Try annotate + annotate empty$ + 'skip$ + { % add annotation + "\begin{APACrefannotation}" write$ newline$ + annotate write$ newline$ + "\end{APACrefannotation}" write$ newline$ + } + if$ + } + { % add annotation + "\begin{APACrefannotation}" write$ newline$ + annote write$ newline$ + "\end{APACrefannotation}" write$ newline$ + } + if$ +%</annotated> } %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%% @@ -12789,6 +14849,15 @@ FUNCTION {definitive.cite.num.names.3.or.more} } if$ } + { % + % Different 5th author: citing 5 authors is + % sufficient for this comparison. + % + cite.num.names.short #5 < + { #5 'cite.num.names.short := } + 'skip$ + if$ + } if$ } if$ @@ -15285,7 +17354,7 @@ FUNCTION {format.bvolume.check} FUNCTION {format.edition.check} { duplicate$ empty$ 'skip$ - { "\PrintCardinal{" swap$ * "}" * + { "\PrintOrdinal{" swap$ * "}" * "\BEd" connect.with.space.check } if$ @@ -17005,6 +19074,7 @@ EXECUTE { end.bib } %</bibstyle|xbibstyle> % \end{macrocode} % +% % \Finale \endinput % |